all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide(01)(PDF)-EN | Users Manual | 5.28 MiB | August 08 2014 | |||
1 |
|
Compliance and Safety Manual | Users Manual | 441.65 KiB | August 08 2014 | |||
1 |
|
Hardware Description-EN | Users Manual | 583.94 KiB | August 08 2014 | |||
1 |
|
Hardware Maintenance Guide-EN | Users Manual | 406.97 KiB | August 08 2014 | |||
1 |
|
Installation Guide-EN | Users Manual | 2.54 MiB | August 08 2014 | |||
1 | RF Exposure Info | August 08 2014 | ||||||
1 | External Photos | August 08 2014 | ||||||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | August 08 2014 | ||||||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | August 08 2014 | ||||||
1 | Test Report | August 08 2014 | ||||||
1 | Test Report | August 08 2014 | ||||||
1 | Internal Photos | August 08 2014 | ||||||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | August 08 2014 | ||||||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | August 08 2014 | ||||||
1 | External Photos | August 08 2014 |
1 | DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide(01)(PDF)-EN | Users Manual | 5.28 MiB | August 08 2014 |
DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Issue Date 01 2011-03-30 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website:
Email:
http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide About This Document About This Document Purpose This document describes the procedures for installing the DBS3900 devices on the Indoor Centralized Rack (ICR). Product Version The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name DBS3900 DBS3900 WCDMA DBS3900 LTE DBS3900 GSM Product Version V100R004 V200R013 V100R003C00 V100R013 Intended Audience This document is intended for:
l Base station installation engineers Organization 1 Changes in the DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations This chapter describes the tools and instruments required for installation and the skills and prerequisites required for onsite installation engineers. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii About This Document DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation This chapter describes the information about the installation, including exterior, installation scenario, and space requirements 4 Unpacking the Equipment Unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact. 5 Obtaining the ESN The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a Network Element (NE). Record the ESN for later commissioning of the base station before installation. 6 Installation Process This section describes the process of installing the DBS39000 on the ICR. 7 Assembling the IFS06 This chapter describes the procedure for assembling the IFS06. 8 Installing the IFS06 This chapter describes the procedure for installing the IFS06 on the concrete floor and ESD floor. 9 Installing the Main Bracket for the RRU This chapter describes the procedure for installing the main bracket for the DC RRU and AC RRU. 10 Installing the GPS Surge Protector This chapter describes the procedure for installing the GPS surge protector. 11 Installing the IMB03 This chapter describes the procedure for installing the IMB03. 12 Installing the Equipotential Cable and PGND Cable This chapter describes the procedures for installing the equipotential cable and PGND cable. 13 Installing Devices in the IMB03 This chapter describes the installation of the devices in the IMB03. 14 Installing the RRU This section describes the procedure for installing the AC RRU and DC RRU. 15 Installing Cables This chapter describes the procedure for installing all the cables. 16 Checklist for the DBS3900 Hardware Installation This section describes the checklist for the DBS3900 hardware installation. 17 Performing the DBS3900 Power-On Check After all devices are installed, you need to check the power-on status of the BBU and RRU. 18 Installing the Cover Plate for the IMB03 iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide About This Document This section describes the procedure for installing the cover plate for the IMB03. Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v About This Document DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Convention
[ ]
{ x | y | ... }
[ x | y | ... ]
{ x | y | ... }*
[ x | y | ... ]*
Description Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected. GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface
>
Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder. Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn. Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Action Click Double-click Drag About This Document Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Contents Contents About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Changes in the DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.............................................................1-1 2 Installation Preparations...........................................................................................................2-1 2.1 Making Documents Available.........................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Tools and Instruments.....................................................................................................................................2-2 2.3 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel................................................................................................2-3 3 Information About the Installation........................................................................................3-1 3.1 Overview of Devices.......................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Installation Options.........................................................................................................................................3-5 3.2.1 Height-Restricted Scenario.................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.2 Height-Unrestricted Scenario...............................................................................................................3-17 3.3 Dimensions and Installation Clearance Requirements..................................................................................3-35 4 Unpacking the Equipment.......................................................................................................4-1 5 Obtaining the ESN.....................................................................................................................5-1 6 Installation Process....................................................................................................................6-1 7 Assembling the IFS06................................................................................................................7-1 8 Installing the IFS06....................................................................................................................8-1 8.1 Installing the IFS06 on the Concrete Floor.....................................................................................................8-2 8.2 Installing the IFS06 on the ESD Floor............................................................................................................8-6 9 Installing the Main Bracket for the RRU...............................................................................9-1 9.1 Installing the Main Bracket for the DC RRU..................................................................................................9-2 9.2 Installing the Main Bracket for the AC RRU..................................................................................................9-3 10 Installing the GPS Surge Protector.....................................................................................10-1 11 Installing the IMB03..............................................................................................................11-1 11.1 Installing the IMB03 on the Upper Level Separately..................................................................................11-2 11.2 Installing the IMB03 on the Lower Level Separately.................................................................................11-3 11.3 Installing the IMB03s on the Upper and Lower Levels..............................................................................11-5 12 Installing the Equipotential Cable and PGND Cable....................................................12-1 Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix Contents DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 13 Installing Devices in the IMB03..........................................................................................13-1 13.1 Installing the BBU.......................................................................................................................................13-2 13.2 Installing the DCDU-03B............................................................................................................................13-3 13.3 (Optional) Installing the Power Equipment (DC/DC).................................................................................13-4 13.4 (Optional) Installing the Power Equipment (AC/DC).................................................................................13-6 14 Installing the RRU.................................................................................................................14-1 14.1 Installing the DC RRU................................................................................................................................14-2 14.2 Installing the AC RRU................................................................................................................................14-5 15 Installing Cables.....................................................................................................................15-1 15.1 Cabling Requirements.................................................................................................................................15-3 15.2 Cable Connections.......................................................................................................................................15-4 15.2.1 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3008s)................................................................................15-5 15.2.2 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3804s)................................................................................15-7 15.2.3 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3201s)................................................................................15-8 15.2.4 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3908s)..............................................................................15-10 15.2.5 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Three RRU3908s+Three RRU3804s)............................................15-12 15.2.6 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Three RRU3008s+Three RRU3804s)............................................15-16 15.2.7 Cable Connections (-48 V, Three RRU3908s + Three RRU3201s)................................................15-18 15.2.8 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Three RRU3008s+Three RRU3201s)............................................15-22 15.2.9 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Three RRU3804s+Three RRU3201s)............................................15-24 15.2.10 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3008s+Six RRU3804s)..................................................15-26 15.2.11 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3908s+Six RRU3804s)..................................................15-28 15.2.12 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3908s+Six RRU3201s)..................................................15-33 15.2.13 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3008s+Six RRU3201s)..................................................15-39 15.2.14 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3804s+Six RRU3201s)..................................................15-41 15.2.15 Cable Connections (AC RRU).......................................................................................................15-43 15.2.16 Cable Connections (220 V AC).....................................................................................................15-44 15.2.17 Cable Connections (+24 V DC).....................................................................................................15-45 15.3 Cable Installation Process.........................................................................................................................15-46 15.4 Cable Routes.............................................................................................................................................15-47 15.5 Installing the PGND Cable for the RRU...................................................................................................15-48 15.6 Installing the Power Cable for the BBU....................................................................................................15-50 15.7 Installing the Input Power Cable...............................................................................................................15-51 15.8 (Optional) Installing the Power Cable and Monitoring Signal Cable for the DCDU...............................15-54 15.9 Installing the Power Cable for the RRU....................................................................................................15-56 15.10 Installing the E1/T1 Cable (FE/GE Cable or FE/GE Optical Cable)......................................................15-59 15.11 Installing the CPRI Optical Cable...........................................................................................................15-61 15.12 Installing the Antenna Jumper for the RRU............................................................................................15-64 15.13 Installing a GPS Clock Signal Cable.......................................................................................................15-67 16 Checklist for the DBS3900 Hardware Installation...........................................................16-1 17 Performing the DBS3900 Power-On Check......................................................................17-1 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Contents 18 Installing the Cover Plate for the IMB03...........................................................................18-1 Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figures Figures Figure 3-1 DCDU-03B.........................................................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-2 BBU3900............................................................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-3 RRU....................................................................................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-4 Power equipment (AC/DC)................................................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-5 Power equipment (DC/DC)................................................................................................................3-5 Figure 3-6 Height-restricted scenario...................................................................................................................3-6 Figure 3-7 Height-restricted scenario (-48 V DC)...............................................................................................3-7 Figure 3-8 Height-restricted scenario (-48 V DC)...............................................................................................3-8 Figure 3-9 Height-restricted scenario (-48 V DC)...............................................................................................3-9 Figure 3-10 Installation of the DC RRUs on the IFS06.....................................................................................3-10 Figure 3-11 Height-restricted scenario (220 V AC)...........................................................................................3-11 Figure 3-12 Height-restricted scenario (220 V AC)...........................................................................................3-12 Figure 3-13 Installation of the DC RRU on the IFS06.......................................................................................3-13 Figure 3-14 Installation of AC RRUs on the IFS06...........................................................................................3-14 Figure 3-15 Height-restricted scenario (+24 V DC)..........................................................................................3-15 Figure 3-16 Height-restricted scenario (+24 V DC)..........................................................................................3-16 Figure 3-17 Installation of the DC RRUs on the IFS06.....................................................................................3-17 Figure 3-18 Height-unrestricted scenario...........................................................................................................3-18 Figure 3-19 Height-unrestricted scenario (-48 V DC).......................................................................................3-19 Figure 3-20 Height-unrestricted scenario (-48 V DC).......................................................................................3-20 Figure 3-21 Height-unrestricted triple-mode scenario (-48 V DC)....................................................................3-21 Figure 3-22 Height-unrestricted scenario (-48 V DC).......................................................................................3-22 Figure 3-23 Height-unrestricted triple-mode scenario (-48 V DC)....................................................................3-23 Figure 3-24 Installation of the DC RRUs on the IFS06.....................................................................................3-24 Figure 3-25 Height-unrestricted scenario (220 V AC).......................................................................................3-25 Figure 3-26 Height-unrestricted scenario (220 V AC).......................................................................................3-26 Figure 3-27 Height-unrestricted scenario (220 V AC).......................................................................................3-27 Figure 3-28 Height-unrestricted triple-mode scenario (220 V AC)...................................................................3-28 Figure 3-29 Installation of the DC RRUs on the IFS06.....................................................................................3-29 Figure 3-30 Installation of AC RRUs on the IFS06...........................................................................................3-30 Figure 3-31 Height-unrestricted scenario (+24 V DC)......................................................................................3-31 Figure 3-32 Height-unrestricted scenario (+24 V DC)......................................................................................3-32 Figure 3-33 Height-unrestricted scenario (+24 V DC)......................................................................................3-33 Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii Figures DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 3-34 Height-unrestricted triple-mode scenario (+24 V DC)...................................................................3-34 Figure 3-35 Installation of the DC RRUs on the IFS06.....................................................................................3-35 Figure 3-36 Dimensions of the IFS06................................................................................................................3-36 Figure 3-37 Dimensions of the IMB03.............................................................................................................. 3-36 Figure 3-38 Recommended clearance for the ICR (DC-RRU-based)................................................................3-37 Figure 3-39 Recommended clearance for the ICR (AC-RRU-based)................................................................3-38 Figure 3-40 Minimum clearance for the ICR in the height-unrestricted scenario............................................. 3-39 Figure 3-41 Minimum clearance for the ICR in the height-restricted scenario................................................. 3-40 Figure 3-42 Minimum clearance for the ICR (AC-RRU-based)........................................................................3-41 Figure 3-43 Clearance requirements for combined cabinets..............................................................................3-42 Figure 5-1 Obtaining the ESN (1)........................................................................................................................5-1 Figure 5-2 Obtaining the ESN (2)........................................................................................................................5-2 Figure 6-1 Installation process.............................................................................................................................6-2 Figure 7-1 Installing the rear feet.........................................................................................................................7-1 Figure 7-2 Installing the front feet.......................................................................................................................7-2 Figure 7-3 Moving down the adjustable beam.....................................................................................................7-3 Figure 7-4 Installing the cable rack......................................................................................................................7-4 Figure 7-5 Installing the adapting piece for the GPS surge protector..................................................................7-5 Figure 8-1 Marking anchor points........................................................................................................................8-2 Figure 8-2 Drilling holes......................................................................................................................................8-3 Figure 8-3 Assembling an expansion bolt............................................................................................................8-3 Figure 8-4 Installing an expansion bolt................................................................................................................8-4 Figure 8-5 Removing a bolt..................................................................................................................................8-4 Figure 8-6 Installing the bolts..............................................................................................................................8-4 Figure 8-7 Pre-tightening the bolts.......................................................................................................................8-5 Figure 8-8 Checking and adjusting the level of the IFS06...................................................................................8-5 Figure 8-9 Tightening the bolts............................................................................................................................8-6 Figure 8-10 Support for installing the ESD floor.................................................................................................8-6 Figure 8-11 Marking anchor points......................................................................................................................8-7 Figure 8-12 Drilling holes....................................................................................................................................8-8 Figure 8-13 Installing the support........................................................................................................................8-8 Figure 8-14 Removing the bolts...........................................................................................................................8-9 Figure 8-15 Install the IFS06..............................................................................................................................8-10 Figure 8-16 Pre-tightening the bolts...................................................................................................................8-10 Figure 8-17 Checking and adjusting the level of the ICR..................................................................................8-11 Figure 8-18 Tightening the bolts........................................................................................................................8-11 Figure 9-1 Main and auxiliary brackets for the RRU...........................................................................................9-1 Figure 9-2 Installing the main bracket in the height-unrestricted scenario..........................................................9-2 Figure 9-3 Installing the main bracket in the height-restricted scenario..............................................................9-3 Figure 9-4 Installing the main bracket in the height-unrestricted scenario..........................................................9-4 Figure 9-5 Installing the main bracket in the height-restricted scenario..............................................................9-5 Figure 10-1 GPS surge protector.......................................................................................................................10-1 xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figures Figure 10-2 Removing the insert nut and toothed washer..................................................................................10-2 Figure 10-3 Installing the connector..................................................................................................................10-2 Figure 10-4 Installing the GPS surge protector..................................................................................................10-2 Figure 10-5 Installing the PGND cable for the GPS surge protector.................................................................10-3 Figure 11-1 Removing the protection plates......................................................................................................11-2 Figure 11-2 Installing mounting ears horizontally.............................................................................................11-2 Figure 11-3 Securing the IMB03 to the feet of the ICR.....................................................................................11-3 Figure 11-4 Removing the protection plates......................................................................................................11-4 Figure 11-5 Installing mounting ears vertically.................................................................................................11-4 Figure 11-6 Securing the IMB03 on the feet of the ICR....................................................................................11-5 Figure 11-7 Removing the protection plates from the lower-level IMB03........................................................11-5 Figure 11-8 Installing mounting ears vertically.................................................................................................11-6 Figure 11-9 Securing the IMB03 to the feet of the ICR.....................................................................................11-6 Figure 11-10 Removing the protection plates from the upper-level IMB03......................................................11-7 Figure 11-11 Installing mounting ears horizontally on the upper-level IMB03................................................11-7 Figure 11-12 Securing the IMB03 to the feet of the ICR...................................................................................11-8 Figure 12-1 Installation of the equipotential cable and PGND cable.................................................................12-2 Figure 13-1 Configurations of the slots in the IMB03.......................................................................................13-1 Figure 13-2 Removing the mounting ears..........................................................................................................13-2 Figure 13-3 Installing the mounting ears reversely............................................................................................13-2 Figure 13-4 Installing the BBU into the slot in the IMB03................................................................................13-3 Figure 13-5 Installing the DCDU-03B into the slot in the IMB03....................................................................13-4 Figure 13-6 Installing the PGND cable for the DCDU-03B..............................................................................13-4 Figure 13-7 Reinstalling the mounting ears.......................................................................................................13-5 Figure 13-8 Installing the power equipment (DC/DC) in the IMB03................................................................13-5 Figure 13-9 Installing the PGND cable for the power equipment (DC/DC)......................................................13-6 Figure 13-10 Installing the power equipment (AC/DC) in the IMB03..............................................................13-7 Figure 13-11 Installing the PGND cable for the power equipment (AC/DC)....................................................13-8 Figure 14-1 Removing the adapting piece and cover plate................................................................................14-2 Figure 14-2 Removing the screws......................................................................................................................14-3 Figure 14-3 Reinstalling the adapting piece and cover plate.............................................................................14-3 Figure 14-4 Connecting the PGND cable for the RRU to the wiring terminal at the bottom............................14-4 Figure 14-5 Installing the RRU on the main bracket.........................................................................................14-4 Figure 14-6 Installing six RRUs.........................................................................................................................14-5 Figure 14-7 Connecting the PGND cable for the RRU to the wiring terminal at the bottom............................14-6 Figure 14-8 Installing the AC RRU on the main bracket...................................................................................14-7 Figure 15-1 Cable connections (-48 V DC, six RRU3008s)..............................................................................15-6 Figure 15-2 Cable connections (-48 V DC, six RRU3804s)..............................................................................15-7 Figure 15-3 Cable connections (-48 V DC, six RRU3201s)..............................................................................15-9 Figure 15-4 Cable connections (-48 V DC, six RRU3908s)............................................................................15-11 Figure 15-5 Cable connections in the dual-mode scenario (-48 V, three RRU3908s + three RRU3804s)......15-13 Figure 15-6 Cable Connections in triple-mode scenario (-48 V DC, Three RRU3908s + Three RRU3804s)
...........................................................................................................................................................................15-15 Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv Figures DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 15-7 Cable connections (-48 V DC, three RRU3008s+three RRU3804s)............................................15-17 Figure 15-8 Cable connections in the dual-mode scenario (-48 V, three RRU3908s + three RRU3201s)......15-19 Figure 15-9 Cable connections in the triple-mode scenario (-48 V, three RRU3908s + three RRU3201s)....15-21 Figure 15-10 Cable connections (-48 V DC, three RRU3008s+three RRU3201s)..........................................15-23 Figure 15-11 Cable connections (-48 V DC, three RRU3804s+three RRU3201s)..........................................15-25 Figure 15-12 Cable connections (-48 V DC, six RRU3008s+six RRU3804s)................................................15-27 Figure 15-13 Cable connections in the dual-mode scenario (-48 V, six RRU3908s + six RRU3804s)..........15-29 Figure 15-14 Cable connections in the GSM+LTE scenario (-48 V, six RRU3908s).....................................15-31 Figure 15-15 Cable connections in the UMTS Only scenario (-48 V, six RRU3804s)...................................15-32 Figure 15-16 Cable connections in the dual-mode scenario (-48 V, six RRU3908s + six RRU3201s)..........15-34 Figure 15-17 Cable connections in the GSM+UMTS Only scenario (-48 V DC, six RRU3908s)..................15-36 Figure 15-18 Cable connections in the LTE Only scenario (-48 V DC, six RRU3201s)................................15-38 Figure 15-19 Cable connections (-48 V DC, six RRU3008s+six RRU3201s)................................................15-40 Figure 15-20 Cable connections (-48 V DC, six RRU3804s+six RRU3201s)................................................15-42 Figure 15-21 Cable connections (AC RRU)....................................................................................................15-43 Figure 15-22 Cable connections (220 V AC)...................................................................................................15-45 Figure 15-23 Cable connections (+24 V DC)..................................................................................................15-46 Figure 15-24 Process of installing the ICR-related cables...............................................................................15-47 Figure 15-25 Cable routes................................................................................................................................15-48 Figure 15-26 Connections of the PGND cables for the DC RRU....................................................................15-49 Figure 15-27 Connections of the PGND cables for the AC RRU....................................................................15-50 Figure 15-28 Installing the power cable for the BBU......................................................................................15-51 Figure 15-29 Installing the input power cable..................................................................................................15-53 Figure 15-30 Installing the power cable and monitoring signal cable (+24 V DC).........................................15-55 Figure 15-31 Installing the power cable and monitoring signal cable (220 V AC).........................................15-56 Figure 15-32 Connections of the power cable for the DC RRU......................................................................15-57 Figure 15-33 Connections of the power cable for the AC RRU......................................................................15-59 Figure 15-34 Connections of the E1/T1 cable..................................................................................................15-60 Figure 15-35 Installing the optical module......................................................................................................15-61 Figure 15-36 Connections of the CPRI optical cable for six DC RRUs..........................................................15-62 Figure 15-37 Connections of the CPRI optical cable for 12 DC RRUs...........................................................15-63 Figure 15-38 Installing the optical module......................................................................................................15-63 Figure 15-39 Connections of the CPRI optical cable for AC RRUs................................................................15-64 Figure 15-40 Connections of the antenna jumper for the DC RRU.................................................................15-66 Figure 15-41 Connections of the antenna jumper for the AC RRU.................................................................15-67 Figure 15-42 GPS clock signal cable...............................................................................................................15-68 Figure 17-1 BBU power-on check process........................................................................................................ 17-2 Figure 17-2 RRU power-on check process........................................................................................................ 17-3 Figure 18-1 Installing the cover plate.................................................................................................................18-1 Figure 18-2 Securing the cover plate..................................................................................................................18-2 xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Tables Tables Table 3-1 Installation of three RRUs (on the lower part of the IFS06 by default)...............................................3-7 Table 3-2 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode)..................................................................................3-8 Table 3-3 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode)......................................................................................3-8 Table 3-4 Installation of 6 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode)...................................................................................3-9 Table 3-5 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode)................................................................................3-9 Table 3-6 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode)....................................................................................3-9 Table 3-7 Installation of 12 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode)...............................................................................3-10 Table 3-8 Installation of three RRUs (on the lower part of the IFS06 by default).............................................3-11 Table 3-9 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode)................................................................................3-12 Table 3-10 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode)..................................................................................3-12 Table 3-11 Installation of 6 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode)...............................................................................3-13 Table 3-12 Installation of three RRUs (on the lower part of the IFS06 by default)...........................................3-15 Table 3-13 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode)..............................................................................3-16 Table 3-14 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode)..................................................................................3-16 Table 3-15 Installation of 6 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode)...............................................................................3-17 Table 3-16 Installation of three RRUs (on the lower part of the IFS06 by default)...........................................3-19 Table 3-17 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode)..............................................................................3-20 Table 3-18 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode)..................................................................................3-20 Table 3-19 Installation of 6 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode)...............................................................................3-21 Table 3-20 Installation of six RRUs (in GSM+UMTS+LTE mode)..................................................................3-21 Table 3-21 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode)............................................................................3-22 Table 3-22 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode)................................................................................3-22 Table 3-23 Installation of 12 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode).............................................................................3-22 Table 3-24 Installation of six RRUs (in GSM+UMTS+LTE mode)..................................................................3-23 Table 3-25 Installation of three RRUs (on the lower part of the IFS06 by default)...........................................3-25 Table 3-26 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode)..............................................................................3-26 Table 3-27 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode)..................................................................................3-26 Table 3-28 Installation of 6 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode)...............................................................................3-27 Table 3-29 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode)............................................................................3-27 Table 3-30 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode)................................................................................3-27 Table 3-31 Installation of 12 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode).............................................................................3-28 Table 3-32 Installation of six RRUs (in GSM+UMTS+LTE mode)..................................................................3-28 Table 3-33 Installation of three RRUs (on the lower part of the IFS06 by default)...........................................3-31 Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii Tables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 3-34 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode)..............................................................................3-32 Table 3-35 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode)..................................................................................3-32 Table 3-36 Installation of 6 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode)...............................................................................3-33 Table 3-37 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode)............................................................................3-33 Table 3-38 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode)................................................................................3-33 Table 3-39 Installation of 12 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode).............................................................................3-34 Table 3-40 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS+LTE mode)..................................................................3-34 Table 15-1 Cable description..............................................................................................................................15-6 Table 15-2 Cable description..............................................................................................................................15-8 Table 15-3 Cable description............................................................................................................................15-10 Table 15-4 Cable description............................................................................................................................15-11 Table 15-5 Cable description............................................................................................................................15-13 Table 15-6 Cable description............................................................................................................................15-16 Table 15-7 Cable description............................................................................................................................15-18 Table 15-8 Cable description............................................................................................................................15-19 Table 15-9 Cable description............................................................................................................................15-22 Table 15-10 Cable description..........................................................................................................................15-23 Table 15-11 Cable description..........................................................................................................................15-25 Table 15-12 Cable description..........................................................................................................................15-28 Table 15-13 Cable description..........................................................................................................................15-30 Table 15-14 Cable description..........................................................................................................................15-31 Table 15-15 Cable description..........................................................................................................................15-33 Table 15-16 Cable description..........................................................................................................................15-35 Table 15-17 Cable description..........................................................................................................................15-36 Table 15-18 Cable description..........................................................................................................................15-39 Table 15-19 Cable description..........................................................................................................................15-41 Table 15-20 Cable description..........................................................................................................................15-43 Table 15-21 Cable description..........................................................................................................................15-44 Table 16-1 Hardware installation checklist........................................................................................................16-1 xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 1 Changes in the DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide 1 Changes in the DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide 01 (2011-03-30) This is the first official release. Compared with Draft A (2011-01-30), no content is changed. Compared with Draft A (2011-01-30), no content is added. Compared with Draft A (2011-01-30), no content is deleted. Draft A (2011-01-30) This is the draft issue. Compared with MBTS V100R003C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R012C00, GSM-BTS V100R012C00 and eNodeB V100R002C00, , this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content 3.2 Installation Options Change Description The structure of the section is changed. Compared with MBTS V100R003C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R012C00, GSM-BTS V100R012C00 and eNodeB V100R002C00, this issue is added with the following topics:
l The triple-mode installation scenario is added. l The cable connections in the triple-mode installation scenario is added. Compared with MBTS V100R003C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R012C00, GSM-BTS V100R012C00 and eNodeB V100R002C00, no content is deleted. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-1 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations 2 Installation Preparations About This Chapter This chapter describes the tools and instruments required for installation and the skills and prerequisites required for onsite installation engineers. 2.1 Making Documents Available Before installing the DBS3900, obtain related information from the following document:
2.2 Tools and Instruments This section describes the tools and instruments required for installation. 2.3 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsite personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-1 2 Installation Preparations DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 2.1 Making Documents Available Before installing the DBS3900, obtain related information from the following document:
l Installation Reference l BBU3900 Hardware Description l BBU3900 Hardware Maintenance Guide 2.2 Tools and Instruments This section describes the tools and instruments required for installation. Marker Phillips screwdriver (M4, M5, M6, and M8) Diagonal pliers Flat-head screwdriver (M4, M5, M6, and M8) Adjustable wrench (capacity 19 mm) Socket wrench (M10 and M12) Torque wrench (30 Nm to 50 Nm) Phillips torque screwdriver Crimping tool Wire clippers Rubber mallet Guarded blade utility knife Wire stripper Hammer drill (16) Heat gun Level 2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations Multimeter Measuring tape Vacuum cleaner ESD gloves ESD wrist strap Hydraulic pliers 2.3 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsite personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions. Before the installation, pay attention to the following items:
l The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be familiar with the proper installation and operation methods. l The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and installation environment. Generally, only three to five onsite personnel are necessary. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-3 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation 3 Information About the Installation About This Chapter This chapter describes the information about the installation, including exterior, installation scenario, and space requirements 3.1 Overview of Devices This chapter describes the devices involved in the installation of the DBS3900. 3.2 Installation Options The installation options vary according to height-restricted and height-unrestricted scenarios. 3.3 Dimensions and Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the dimensions and installation clearance requirements for the relevant devices. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-1 3 Information About the Installation 3.1 Overview of Devices DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide This chapter describes the devices involved in the installation of the DBS3900. IFS06 The IFS06 is an Indoor Floor Installation Support (IFS). It is used for installing DBS3900 devices in a centralized manner.
(1) Cable rack
(5) Adjustable beam
(2) Ground bar 2
(6) Ground bar 1
(3) Rear foot
(4) Front foot
(7) Main frame
-
NOTE In this document, the cable colors and exteriors of the devices are for reference only. IMB03 The IMB03 is an Indoor Mini Box (IMB). It is used for installing the BBU and power devices. 3-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation
(1) NO STEPPING sign
(3) Slot assignment label
(2) Protection plate
(4) Cover plate Other Devices Figure 3-1 DCDU-03B Figure 3-2 BBU3900 Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-3 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-3 RRU DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide WARNING l Place the foam pad or cardboard under the RRU to prevent any damage to the housing of the RRU. l The load-bearing capacity of the RF ports at the bottom of the RRU is low. Do not stand the RRU upright. Figure 3-4 Power equipment (AC/DC) 3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-5 Power equipment (DC/DC) 3.2 Installation Options The installation options vary according to height-restricted and height-unrestricted scenarios. NOTE The ICR is an indoor centralized rack, integrating the IFS06 with the IMB03. The IFS06 is an indoor floor installation support. The IMB03 is an indoor mini box. 3.2.1 Height-Restricted Scenario This section describes the installation of the DBS3900 on the ICR in the height-restricted scenario. 3.2.2 Height-Unrestricted Scenario This section describes the installation of the DBS3900 on the ICR in the height-unrestricted scenario. 3.2.1 Height-Restricted Scenario This section describes the installation of the DBS3900 on the ICR in the height-restricted scenario. In the scenario where a cable rack is 1.8 m to 2 m above the floor (hereinafter referred to as the height-restricted scenario), the RRUs are installed on beam 2 and beam 4, as shown in Figure 3-6. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-5 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-6 Height-restricted scenario DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide
(1) Cable rack
(2) Beam 2
(3) Beam 4 Height-Restricted Scenario (-48 V) This section describes the -48 V height-restricted scenario. In this scenario, RRUs can be installed on the IFS06 with the IMB03 or on the IFS06 independently. RRU and IMB03 combination installation scenario (IFS06+IMB03+RRU) In this scenario, three RRUs, six RRUs, or 12 RRUs are installed. l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (Three DC RRUs) 3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-7 Height-restricted scenario (-48 V DC) Table 3-1 Installation of three RRUs (on the lower part of the IFS06 by default) Position GSM Mode UMTS Mode LTE Mode Lower part Three RRU3008s, or three RRU3004s Three RRU3804s, three RRU3801Es, three RRU3806s, three RRU3808s, or three RRU3805s Three RRU3201s, three RRU3211s, three RRU3203s, three RRU3233s, three RRU3222s, or three RRU3232s GSM+UMTS/
GSM+LTE Three RRU3908s, or three RRU3920s NOTE The RRU3008, and RRU3004 support the GSM mode. The following description is based on the RRU3008. The RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3808, and RRU3805 support the UMTS mode. The following description is based on the RRU3804. The RRU3201, RRU3211, RRU3203, RRU3233, RRU3222, and RRU3232 support the LTE mode. The following description is based on the RRU3201. The RRU3908 and RRU3920 support the multi-mode . The following description is based on the RRU3908. l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (Six DC RRUs) Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-7 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-8 Height-restricted scenario (-48 V DC) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 3-2 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode) Position GSM Mode UMTS Mode GSM
+UMTS Mode Upper part Lower part Three RRU3008s Three RRU3008s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3908s Three RRU3908s GSM
+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3908s Three RRU3804s GSM
+UMTS Co-Cabinet Three RRU3008s Three RRU3804s Table 3-3 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode) Position GSM Mode LTE Mode Upper part Lower part Three RRU3008s Three RRU3008s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3201s GSM+LTE Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3908s Three RRU3201s GSM+LTE Co-Cabinet Three RRU3008s Three RRU3201s 3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Table 3-4 Installation of 6 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode) Position UMTS Mode LTE Mode Three RRU3804s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3201s UMTS+LTE Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3804s Upper part Lower part l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (12 DC RRUs) Figure 3-9 Height-restricted scenario (-48 V DC) Table 3-5 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode) Position ICR1 ICR2 GSM+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Six RRU3908s Six RRU3804s GSM+UMTS Co-Cabinet Six RRU3008s Six RRU3804s Table 3-6 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode) Position ICR1 ICR2 GSM+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Six RRU3908s Six RRU3201s GSM+UMTS Co-Cabinet Six RRU3008s Six RRU3201s Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-9 3 Information About the Installation DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 3-7 Installation of 12 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode) Position ICR1 ICR2 UMTS+LTE Co-Cabinet Six RRU3804s Six RRU3201s Independent RRU installation scenario (IFS06+RRU) In this scenario, three RRUs or six RRUs are installed. The configurations and installations of the RRUs in the IFS06+RRU scenario and in the IFS06+IMB03+RRU scenario are the same. For details, see RRU and IMB03 combination installation scenario (IFS06+IMB03
+RRU). Figure 3-10 takes the installation of six RRUs as an example. Figure 3-10 Installation of the DC RRUs on the IFS06 Height-Restricted Scenario (220 V) This section describes the 220 V height-restricted scenario. In this scenario, RRUs can be installed on the IFS06 with the IMB03 or on the IFS06 independently. RRU and IMB03 combination installation scenario (IFS06+IMB03+RRU) In this scenario, three RRUs or six RRUs are installed. l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (Three DC RRUs) 3-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-11 Height-restricted scenario (220 V AC) Table 3-8 Installation of three RRUs (on the lower part of the IFS06 by default) Position GSM Mode UMTS Mode LTE Mode Upper part Three RRU3008s, or three RRU3004s Three RRU3804s, three RRU3801Es, three RRU3806s, three RRU3808s, or three RRU3805s Three RRU3201s, three RRU3211s, three RRU3203s, three RRU3233s, three RRU3222s, or three RRU3232s GSM+UMTS/
GSM+LTE Three RRU3908s, or three RRU3920s NOTE The RRU3008, and RRU3004 support the GSM mode. The following description is based on the RRU3008. The RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3808, and RRU3805 support the UMTS mode. The following description is based on the RRU3804. The RRU3201, RRU3211, RRU3203, RRU3233, RRU3222, and RRU3232 support the LTE mode. The following description is based on the RRU3201. The RRU3908 and RRU3920 support the multi-mode . The following description is based on the RRU3908. l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (Six DC RRUs) Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-11 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-12 Height-restricted scenario (220 V AC) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 3-9 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode) Position GSM Mode UMTS Mode GSM
+UMTS Mode ICR1 ICR2 Three RRU3008s Three RRU3008s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3908s Three RRU3908s GSM
+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3908s Three RRU3804s GSM
+UMTS Co-Cabinet Three RRU3008s Three RRU3804s Table 3-10 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode) Position GSM Mode LTE Mode ICR1 ICR2 Three RRU3008s Three RRU3008s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3201s GSM+LTE Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3908s Three RRU3201s GSM+LTE Co-Cabinet Three RRU3008s Three RRU3201s 3-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Table 3-11 Installation of 6 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode) Position UMTS Mode LTE Mode Three RRU3804s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3201s UMTS+LTE Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3804s ICR1 ICR2 Independent RRU installation scenario (IFS06+RRU) l IFS06+RRU (DC RRU) In this scenario, three RRUs or six RRUs are installed. The configurations and installations of the RRUs in the IFS06+RRU scenario and in the IFS06+IMB03+RRU scenario are the same. For details, see RRU and IMB03 combination installation scenario (IFS06+IMB03
+RRU). Figure 3-13 takes the installation of six RRUs as an example. Figure 3-13 Installation of the DC RRU on the IFS06 l IFS06+RRU (AC RRU) Figure 3-14 shows the installation of AC RRUs on the IFS06. NOTE The description of the AC RRU in this document is based on the AC RRU3908. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-13 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-14 Installation of AC RRUs on the IFS06 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Height-Restricted Scenario (+24 V) This section describes the +24 V height-restricted scenario. In this scenario, RRUs can be installed on the IFS06 with the IMB03 or on the IFS06 independently. RRU and IMB03 combination installation scenario (IFS06+IMB03+RRU) In this scenario, three RRUs or six RRUs are installed. l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (Three DC RRUs) 3-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-15 Height-restricted scenario (+24 V DC) Table 3-12 Installation of three RRUs (on the lower part of the IFS06 by default) Position GSM Mode UMTS Mode LTE Mode Upper part Three RRU3008s, or three RRU3004s Three RRU3804s, three RRU3801Es, three RRU3806s, three RRU3808s, or three RRU3805s Three RRU3201s, three RRU3211s, three RRU3203s, three RRU3233s, three RRU3222s, or three RRU3232s GSM+UMTS/
GSM+LTE Three RRU3908s, or three RRU3920s NOTE The RRU3008, and RRU3004 support the GSM mode. The following description is based on the RRU3008. The RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3808, and RRU3805 support the UMTS mode. The following description is based on the RRU3804. The RRU3201, RRU3211, RRU3203, RRU3233, RRU3222, and RRU3232 support the LTE mode. The following description is based on the RRU3201. The RRU3908 and RRU3920 support the multi-mode . The following description is based on the RRU3908. l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (Six DC RRUs) Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-15 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-16 Height-restricted scenario (+24 V DC) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 3-13 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode) Position GSM Mode UMTS Mode GSM
+UMTS Mode ICR1 ICR2 Three RRU3008s Three RRU3008s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3908s Three RRU3908s GSM
+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3908s Three RRU3804s GSM
+UMTS Co-Cabinet Three RRU3008s Three RRU3804s Table 3-14 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode) Position GSM Mode LTE Mode ICR1 ICR2 Three RRU3008s Three RRU3008s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3201s GSM+LTE Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3908s Three RRU3201s GSM+LTE Co-Cabinet Three RRU3008s Three RRU3201s 3-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Table 3-15 Installation of 6 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode) Position UMTS Mode LTE Mode Three RRU3804s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3201s UMTS+LTE Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3804s ICR1 ICR2 Independent RRU installation scenario (IFS06+RRU) In this scenario, three RRUs or six RRUs are installed. The configurations and installations of the RRUs in the IFS06+RRU scenario and in the IFS06+IMB03+RRU scenario are the same. For details, see RRU and IMB03 combination installation scenario (IFS06+IMB03
+RRU). Figure 3-17 takes the installation of six RRUs as an example. Figure 3-17 Installation of the DC RRUs on the IFS06 3.2.2 Height-Unrestricted Scenario This section describes the installation of the DBS3900 on the ICR in the height-unrestricted scenario. In the scenario where a cable rack is more than 2 m above the floor (hereinafter referred to as the height-unrestricted scenario), the RRUs are installed on beam 1 and beam 3 by default, as shown in Figure 3-18. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-17 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-18 Height-unrestricted scenario DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide
(1) Cable rack
(2) Beam 1
(3) Beam 3 Height-Unrestricted Scenario (-48 V) This section describes the -48 V height-unrestricted scenario. In this scenario, RRUs can be installed on the IFS06 with the IMB03 or on the IFS06 independently. RRU and IMB03 combination installation scenario (IFS06+IMB03+RRU) In this scenario, three RRUs, six RRUs, or 12 RRUs are installed. l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (Three DC RRUs) 3-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-19 Height-unrestricted scenario (-48 V DC) Table 3-16 Installation of three RRUs (on the lower part of the IFS06 by default) Position GSM Mode UMTS Mode LTE Mode Lower part Three RRU3008s, or three RRU3004s Three RRU3804s, three RRU3801Es, three RRU3806s, three RRU3808s, or three RRU3805s Three RRU3201s, three RRU3211s, three RRU3203s, three RRU3233s, three RRU3222s, or three RRU3232s GSM+UMTS/
GSM+LTE Three RRU3908s, or three RRU3920s NOTE The RRU3008, and RRU3004 support the GSM mode. The following description is based on the RRU3008. The RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3808, and RRU3805 support the UMTS mode. The following description is based on the RRU3804. The RRU3201, RRU3211, RRU3203, RRU3233, RRU3222, and RRU3232 support the LTE mode. The following description is based on the RRU3201. The RRU3908 and RRU3920 support the multi-mode . The following description is based on the RRU3908. l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (Six DC RRUs) Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-19 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-20 Height-unrestricted scenario (-48 V DC) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 3-17 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode) Position GSM Mode UMTS Mode GSM
+UMTS Mode Upper part Lower part Three RRU3008s Three RRU3008s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3908s Three RRU3908s GSM
+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3908s Three RRU3804s GSM
+UMTS Co-Cabinet Three RRU3008s Three RRU3804s Table 3-18 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode) Position GSM Mode LTE Mode Upper part Lower part Three RRU3008s Three RRU3008s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3201s GSM+LTE Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3908s Three RRU3201s GSM+LTE Co-Cabinet Three RRU3008s Three RRU3201s 3-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Table 3-19 Installation of 6 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode) Position LTE Mode UMTS Mode Three RRU3804s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3201s UMTS+LTE Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3804s Upper part Lower part NOTE When 6 RRUs are configured, one DCDU and one BBU are added in the triple mode scenario, as shown in Figure 3-21. Figure 3-21 Height-unrestricted triple-mode scenario (-48 V DC) Table 3-20 Installation of six RRUs (in GSM+UMTS+LTE mode) Position Upper part GU+LTE Three RRU3908s GL+UMTS Three RRU3908s Lower part Three RRU3201s Three RRU3804s l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (12 DC RRUs) Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-21 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-22 Height-unrestricted scenario (-48 V DC) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 3-21 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode) Position GSM+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Six RRU3908s ICR1 ICR2 Six RRU3804s GSM+UMTS Co-Cabinet Six RRU3008s Six RRU3804s Table 3-22 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode) Position GSM+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Six RRU3908s Six RRU3201s GSM+UMTS Co-Cabinet Six RRU3008s Six RRU3201s ICR1 ICR2 Table 3-23 Installation of 12 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode) Position ICR1 UMTS+LTE Co-Cabinet Six RRU3804s ICR2 Six RRU3201s 3-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation NOTE When 12 RRUs are configured, one BBU is added in the triple mode scenario, as shown in Figure 3-23. Figure 3-23 Height-unrestricted triple-mode scenario (-48 V DC) Table 3-24 Installation of six RRUs (in GSM+UMTS+LTE mode) Position ICR1 GU+LTE Six RRU3908s GL+UMTS Six RRU3908s ICR2 Six RRU3201s Six RRU3804s Independent RRU installation scenario (IFS06+RRU) In this scenario, three RRUs or six RRUs are installed. The configurations and installations of the RRUs in the IFS06+RRU scenario and in the IFS06+IMB03+RRU scenario are the same. For details, see RRU and IMB03 combination installation scenario (IFS06+IMB03
+RRU). Figure 3-24 takes the installation of six RRUs as an example. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-23 3 Information About the Installation DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 3-24 Installation of the DC RRUs on the IFS06 Height-Unrestricted Scenario (220 V) This section describes the 220 V height-unrestricted scenario. In this scenario, RRUs can be installed on the IFS06 with the IMB03 or on the IFS06 independently. RRU and IMB03 combination installation scenario (IFS06+IMB03+RRU) In this scenario, three RRUs, six RRUs, or 12 RRUs are installed. l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (Three DC RRUs) 3-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-25 Height-unrestricted scenario (220 V AC) Table 3-25 Installation of three RRUs (on the lower part of the IFS06 by default) Position GSM Mode UMTS Mode LTE Mode Lower part Three RRU3008s, or three RRU3004s Three RRU3804s, three RRU3801Es, three RRU3806s, three RRU3808s, or three RRU3805s Three RRU3201s, three RRU3211s, three RRU3203s, three RRU3233s, three RRU3222s, or three RRU3232s GSM+UMTS/
GSM+LTE Three RRU3908s, or three RRU3920s NOTE The RRU3008, and RRU3004 support the GSM mode. The following description is based on the RRU3008. The RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3808, and RRU3805 support the UMTS mode. The following description is based on the RRU3804. The RRU3201, RRU3211, RRU3203, RRU3233, RRU3222, and RRU3232 support the LTE mode. The following description is based on the RRU3201. The RRU3908 and RRU3920 support the multi-mode . The following description is based on the RRU3908. l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (Three DC RRUs) Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-25 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-26 Height-unrestricted scenario (220 V AC) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 3-26 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode) Position GSM Mode UMTS Mode GSM
+UMTS Mode Upper part Lower part Three RRU3008s Three RRU3008s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3908s Three RRU3908s GSM
+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3908s Three RRU3804s GSM
+UMTS Co-Cabinet Three RRU3008s Three RRU3804s Table 3-27 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode) Position GSM Mode LTE Mode Upper part Lower part Three RRU3008s Three RRU3008s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3201s GSM+LTE Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3908s Three RRU3201s GSM+LTE Co-Cabinet Three RRU3008s Three RRU3201s 3-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Table 3-28 Installation of 6 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode) Position UMTS Mode LTE Mode Three RRU3804s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3201s UMTS+LTE Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3804s Upper part Lower part l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (12 DC RRUs) Figure 3-27 Height-unrestricted scenario (220 V AC) Table 3-29 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode) Position ICR1 ICR2 GSM+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Six RRU3908s Six RRU3804s GSM+UMTS Co-Cabinet Six RRU3008s Six RRU3804s Table 3-30 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode) Position ICR1 GSM+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Six RRU3908s GSM+UMTS Co-Cabinet Six RRU3008s Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-27 3 Information About the Installation DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Position ICR2 GSM+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Six RRU3201s GSM+UMTS Co-Cabinet Six RRU3201s Table 3-31 Installation of 12 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode) Position ICR1 ICR2 UMTS+LTE Co-Cabinet Six RRU3804s Six RRU3201s NOTE When 12 RRUs are configured, one BBU is added in the triple mode scenario, as shown in Figure 3-28. Figure 3-28 Height-unrestricted triple-mode scenario (220 V AC) Table 3-32 Installation of six RRUs (in GSM+UMTS+LTE mode) Position ICR1 ICR2 GU+LTE Six RRU3908s Six RRU3201s GL+UMTS Six RRU3908s Six RRU3804s 3-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Independent RRU installation scenario (IFS06+RRU) l IFS06+RRU (DC RRU) In this scenario, three RRUs or six RRUs are installed. The configurations and installations of the RRUs in the IFS06+RRU scenario and in the IFS06+IMB03+RRU scenario are the same. For details, see RRU and IMB03 combination installation scenario (IFS06+IMB03
+RRU). Figure 3-29 takes the installation of six RRUs as an example. Figure 3-29 Installation of the DC RRUs on the IFS06 l IFS06+RRU (AC RRU) Figure 3-30 shows the installation of AC RRUs on the IFS06. NOTE The description of the AC RRU in this document is based on the AC RRU3908. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-29 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-30 Installation of AC RRUs on the IFS06 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Height-Unrestricted Scenario (+24 V) This section describes the +24 V height-unrestricted scenario. In this scenario, RRUs can be installed on the IFS06 with the IMB03 or on the IFS06 independently. RRU and IMB03 combination installation scenario (IFS06+IMB03+RRU) In this scenario, three RRUs, six RRUs, or 12 RRUs are installed. l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (Three DC RRUs) 3-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-31 Height-unrestricted scenario (+24 V DC) Table 3-33 Installation of three RRUs (on the lower part of the IFS06 by default) Position GSM Mode UMTS Mode LTE Mode Lower part Three RRU3008s, or three RRU3004s Three RRU3804s, three RRU3801Es, three RRU3806s, three RRU3808s, or three RRU3805s Three RRU3201s, three RRU3211s, three RRU3203s, three RRU3233s, three RRU3222s, or three RRU3232s GSM+UMTS/
GSM+LTE Three RRU3908s, or three RRU3920s NOTE The RRU3008, and RRU3004 support the GSM mode. The following description is based on the RRU3008. The RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3808, and RRU3805 support the UMTS mode. The following description is based on the RRU3804. The RRU3201, RRU3211, RRU3203, RRU3233, RRU3222, and RRU3232 support the LTE mode. The following description is based on the RRU3201. The RRU3908 and RRU3920 support the multi-mode . The following description is based on the RRU3908. l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (Six DC RRUs) Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-31 3 Information About the Installation DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 3-32 Height-unrestricted scenario (+24 V DC) Table 3-34 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode) Position GSM Mode UMTS Mode GSM
+UMTS Mode Upper part Lower part Three RRU3008s Three RRU3008s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3908s Three RRU3908s GSM
+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3908s Three RRU3804s GSM
+UMTS Co-Cabinet Three RRU3008s Three RRU3804s Table 3-35 Installation of 6 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode) Position GSM Mode LTE Mode Upper part Lower part Three RRU3008s Three RRU3008s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3201s GSM+LTE Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3908s Three RRU3201s GSM+LTE Co-Cabinet Three RRU3008s Three RRU3201s 3-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Table 3-36 Installation of 6 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode) Position UMTS Mode LTE Mode Three RRU3804s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3804s Three RRU3201s Three RRU3201s UMTS+LTE Co-
Cabinet Three RRU3804s Upper part Lower part l IFS06+IMB03+RRU (12 DC RRUs) Figure 3-33 Height-unrestricted scenario (+24 V DC) Table 3-37 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS mode) Position ICR1 ICR2 GSM+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Six RRU3908s Six RRU3804s GSM+UMTS Co-Cabinet Six RRU3008s Six RRU3804s Table 3-38 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+LTE mode) Position ICR1 ICR2 GSM+UMTS Hybrid Co-
Cabinet Six RRU3908s Six RRU3201s GSM+UMTS Co-Cabinet Six RRU3008s Six RRU3201s Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-33 3 Information About the Installation DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 3-39 Installation of 12 RRUs (in UMTS+LTE mode) Position ICR1 UMTS+LTE Co-Cabinet Six RRU3804s ICR2 Six RRU3201s NOTE When 12 RRUs are configured, one BBU is added in the triple mode scenario, as shown in Figure 3-34. Figure 3-34 Height-unrestricted triple-mode scenario (+24 V DC) Table 3-40 Installation of 12 RRUs (in GSM+UMTS+LTE mode) Position ICR1 GU+LTE Six RRU3908s GL+UMTS Six RRU3908s ICR2 Six RRU3201s Six RRU3804s Independent RRU installation scenario (IFS06+RRU) In this scenario, three RRUs or six RRUs are installed. The configurations and installations of the RRUs in the IFS06+RRU scenario and in the IFS06+IMB03+RRU scenario are the same. 3-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation For details, see RRU and IMB03 combination installation scenario (IFS06+IMB03
+RRU). Figure 3-35 takes the installation of six RRUs as an example. Figure 3-35 Installation of the DC RRUs on the IFS06 3.3 Dimensions and Installation Clearance Requirements This section describes the dimensions and installation clearance requirements for the relevant devices. Dimensions Figure 3-36 shows the dimensions of the IFS06. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-35 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-36 Dimensions of the IFS06 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 3-37 shows the dimensions of the IMB03. Figure 3-37 Dimensions of the IMB03 Recommended Clearance for the ICR (DC-RRU-Based) Figure 3-38 shows the recommended clearance for installing the ICR where the DC RRU is installed. 3-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-38 Recommended clearance for the ICR (DC-RRU-based) Recommended Clearance for the ICR (AC-RRU-Based) Figure 3-39 shows the recommended clearance for installing the ICR where the AC RRU is installed. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-37 3 Information About the Installation DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 3-39 Recommended clearance for the ICR (AC-RRU-based) NOTE When the recommended clearance is provided, the IFS06 where the AC RRU is installed can be installed with its left side against the wall. Minimum Clearance for the ICR (DC-RRU-Based) Figure 3-40 and Figure 3-41 show the minimum clearance for installing the ICR where the DC RRU is installed. 3-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-40 Minimum clearance for the ICR in the height-unrestricted scenario Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-39 3 Information About the Installation DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 3-41 Minimum clearance for the ICR in the height-restricted scenario NOTE When the minimum clearance is provided, the IFS06 where the DC RRU is installed can be installed with its back and both sides against the wall. Minimum Clearance for the ICR (AC-RRU-Based) Figure 3-42 shows the minimum clearance for the installing the ICR where the AC RRU is installed. 3-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-42 Minimum clearance for the ICR (AC-RRU-based) NOTE When the minimum clearance is provided, the IFS06 where the AC RRU is installed can be installed with its back and left side against the wall. Clearance Requirements for Combined Cabinets Figure 3-43 shows the clearance requirements for combined cabinets. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-41 3 Information About the Installation DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 3-43 Clearance requirements for combined cabinets 3-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 4 Unpacking the Equipment 4 Unpacking the Equipment Unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact. Context NOTE When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts, you must:
l l Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts with bare hands, sweat-
Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects. soaked gloves, or dirty gloves. Procedure Step 1 Check the total number of articles in each case according to the packing list. If ... Then ... The total number tallies with the packing list Go to Step 2. The total number does not tally with the packing list Find out the cause and report any missing articles to the local Huawei office. Step 2 Check the exterior of the packing case. If ... Then ... The outer packing is intact Go to Step 3. The outer packing is severely damaged or soaked Find out the cause and report it to the local Huawei office. Step 3 Check the type and quantity of the equipment in the cases according to the packing list. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-1 4 Unpacking the Equipment DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide If ... Then ... Types and quantity of the article tally with those on the packing list Sign the Packing List with the customer. There is any shipment shortage or wrong shipment Fill in and submit the Cargo Shortage and Mishandling Report. Articles are damaged. Fill in and submit the Article Replacement Report. WARNING To protect the equipment and prevent damage to the equipment, you are advised to keep the unpacked equipment and packing materials indoors, take photos of the stocking environment, packing case or carton, packing materials, and any rusted or eroded equipment, and then file the photos.
----End 4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 5 Obtaining the ESN 5 Obtaining the ESN The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a Network Element (NE). Record the ESN for later commissioning of the base station before installation. Procedure Step 1 Record the ESN on the BBU. l If there is not a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, you must record the ESN and site information that is printed on a mounting ear of the BBU. Figure 5-1 shows the position of the ESN. l If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the label and a mounting ear of the BBU. In this case, you must take the label and record the site information on the side labeled Site, as shown in Figure 5-2. Figure 5-1 Obtaining the ESN (1) Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-1 5 Obtaining the ESN Figure 5-2 Obtaining the ESN (2) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Step 2 Report the ESN to the engineer for the commissioning of the base station.
----End 5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 6 Installation Process 6 Installation Process This section describes the process of installing the DBS39000 on the ICR. Figure 6-1 shows the installation process. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-1 6 Installation Process Figure 6-1 Installation process DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 7 Assembling the IFS06 7 Assembling the IFS06 This chapter describes the procedure for assembling the IFS06. Procedure Step 1 Use four M12x30 bolt assemblies to secure the rear feet to the main frame, as shown in Figure 7-1. NOTE Place the foam pad or cardboard under the IFS06 to prevent any damage to the paint. Figure 7-1 Installing the rear feet Step 2 Rotate the IFS06 by 180, and then use six M12x30 bolt assemblies to secure the front feet to the main frame, as shown in Figure 7-2. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-1 7 Assembling the IFS06 Figure 7-2 Installing the front feet DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Step 3 Move down the adjustable beam from the 2 m high position to the 1.8 m high position, as shown in Figure 7-3. NOTE In the height-restricted scenario, move the adjustable beam to the 1.8 m high position. In the height-unrestricted scenario, skip the step. 7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 7 Assembling the IFS06 Figure 7-3 Moving down the adjustable beam Step 4 Fit the tabs of the cable rack into the corresponding slots on the columns of the IFS06, as shown in Figure 7-4. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-3 7 Assembling the IFS06 Figure 7-4 Installing the cable rack DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide
(1) Slot for installing the cable rack in the height-
unrestricted scenario
(2) Slot for installing the cable rack in the height-
restricted scenario NOTE In the height-unrestricted scenario, fit the tabs of the cable rack into the slots for the height-unrestricted scenario. In the height-restricted scenario, fit the tabs of the cable rack into the slots for the height-restricted scenario. Step 5 Install the adapting piece for the GPS surge protector to the upper adjustable beam, as shown in Figure 7-5. 7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 7 Assembling the IFS06 Figure 7-5 Installing the adapting piece for the GPS surge protector
----End Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-5 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 8 Installing the IFS06 8 Installing the IFS06 About This Chapter This chapter describes the procedure for installing the IFS06 on the concrete floor and ESD floor. 8.1 Installing the IFS06 on the Concrete Floor This section describes the procedure for installing the IFS06 on the concrete floor. 8.2 Installing the IFS06 on the ESD Floor This section describes the procedure for installing the IFS06 on the ESD floor. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-1 8 Installing the IFS06 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 8.1 Installing the IFS06 on the Concrete Floor This section describes the procedure for installing the IFS06 on the concrete floor. Procedure Step 1 Place the marking template on the horizontal floor, and then use a marker to mark four anchor points, as shown in Figure 8-1. Figure 8-1 Marking anchor points
(1) Wall
(2) Front
(3) Left Step 2 Drill holes at the anchor points and install the expansion bolt assemblies. 1. Use a hammer drill with bit 16 to drill holes at the marked anchor points. Ensure that the depth of each hole ranges from 52 mm to 60 mm, as shown in Figure 8-2. Use a vacuum cleaner to clear the dust inside and around the holes. If the inter-hole spacing is too wide or too narrow, locate and drill holes again. 8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 8-2 Drilling holes 8 Installing the IFS06 CAUTION Take proper safety measures before drilling holes to protect your eyes and respiratory tract against the dust. 2. Assemble the expansion bolt assembly by referring to Figure 8-3, slightly tighten the expansion bolt, and then insert it into the hole vertically. Figure 8-3 Assembling an expansion bolt
(1) M12x60 bolt
(2) Spring washer 12
(3) Flat washer 12
(4) Expansion tube 3. Use a rubber mallet to hammer the expansion bolt until the expansion tube is buried into the hole, and then use a torque wrench to tighten the M12x60 bolt until the tightening torque reaches 45 Nm, as shown in Figure 8-4. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-3 8 Installing the IFS06 Figure 8-4 Installing an expansion bolt DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 4. Remove the M12x60 bolt, spring washer, and flat washer from each expansion bolt assembly in sequence, as shown in Figure 8-5. Figure 8-5 Removing a bolt Step 3 Install the bolts in the corresponding mounting holes on the IFS06, as shown in Figure 8-6. Figure 8-6 Installing the bolts
(1) M12x60 bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Insulation washer 1. Place the IFS06 in the position for installation, and then align the mounting holes on the IFS06 with the anchor points on the floor. 8-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 8 Installing the IFS06 2. 3. Lead each bolt through the spring washer, flat washer, and insulation washer in sequence, and then install the bolt in the mounting hole on the IFS06. Install the bolt into the expansion tube. Step 4 Use a level to check whether the feet of the IFS06 are on a horizontal plane. If not, add adjusting pads to ensure that the feet of the IFS06 are on a horizontal plane. 1. Pre-tighten the bolts, as shown in Figure 8-7. Figure 8-7 Pre-tightening the bolts 2. Use a level to check whether the feet and bottom beam of the IFS06 are on a horizontal plane, as shown in Figure 8-8. Figure 8-8 Checking and adjusting the level of the IFS06
(1) Level
(2) Adjusting pad 3. Add adjusting pads to ensure that the feet and bottom beam of the IFS06 are on a horizontal plane, as shown in Figure 8-8. NOTE The adjusting pads must be added at the expansion bolt assemblies. Tightening the bolts using a socket wrench, as shown in Figure 8-9. 4. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-5 8 Installing the IFS06 Figure 8-9 Tightening the bolts DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide
----End 8.2 Installing the IFS06 on the ESD Floor This section describes the procedure for installing the IFS06 on the ESD floor. Context Figure 8-10 shows the support for installing the ESD floor, which is classified into support with adjustable height (I) and support with fixed height (II). The installation process of two supports is the same, and the following descriptions are based on the support with adjustable height (I). Figure 8-10 Support for installing the ESD floor
(1) Mounting holes for the ESD floor
(2) Support
(3) Mounting hole for the concrete floor The height of an ESD floor refers to the spacing between the concrete floor and the upper surface of the ESD floor. 8-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Procedure Type I II 8 Installing the IFS06 Height of the ESD Floor 296 mm to 495 mm At least 120 mm, depending on the actual floor height Step 1 Place the marking template on the ESD floor, and then use a marker to mark four anchor points, as shown in Figure 8-11. Figure 8-11 Marking anchor points
(1) Wall
(2) Front
(3) Left Step 2 Drill holes on the ESD floor, as shown in Figure 8-12. Ensure that the hammer drill penetrates the ESD floor. Use a vacuum cleaner to clear the dust inside and around the holes. If the inter-hole spacing is too wide or too narrow, locate and drill holes again. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-7 8 Installing the IFS06 Figure 8-12 Drilling holes DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide CAUTION Take proper safety measures before drilling holes to protect your eyes and respiratory tract against the dust. Step 3 Install the support for installing the ESD floor, as shown in Figure 8-13. Figure 8-13 Installing the support
(1) M12x70 bolt
(2, 5) Spring washer 12
(3,6) Flat washer 12
(4) M12x60 bolt 8-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 8 Installing the IFS06 1. Mark the positions of the mounting hole for the concrete floor on the concrete floor, drill holes in the positions, and then install the expansion bolt assemblies. Place the support under the ESD floor, and then use M12x70 bolts to temporarily secure the support. 2. NOTE The height locking bolts are delivered with the support for installing the ESD floor. When tightening the height locking bolts, you should tighten the bolts in the middle before tightening the bolts on both sides. Step 4 Remove the bolts that you use in Step 3 to temporarily secure the support for installing the ESD floor, as shown in Figure 8-14. Figure 8-14 Removing the bolts Step 5 Install the IFS06 on the ESD Floor, as shown in Figure 8-15. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-9 8 Installing the IFS06 Figure 8-15 Install the IFS06. DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide
(1) M12x70 bolt
(2) Spring washer
(3) Flat washer
(4) Insulating washer Step 6 Use a level to check whether the feet of the ICR are on a horizontal plane. If not, add adjusting pads to ensure that the feet of the ICR are on a horizontal plane. 1. Pre-tighten the bolts, as shown in Figure 8-16. Figure 8-16 Pre-tightening the bolts 2. Use a level to check whether the feet and bottom beam of the ICR are on a horizontal plane, as shown in Figure 8-17. 8-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 8 Installing the IFS06 Figure 8-17 Checking and adjusting the level of the ICR
(1) Level
(2) Adjusting pad 3. Add adjusting pads to ensure that the feet and bottom beam of the ICR are on a horizontal plane, as shown in Figure 8-17. NOTE The adjusting pads should be added at the expansion bolt assemblies. Tightening the bolts using a socket wrench, as shown in Figure 8-18. 4. Figure 8-18 Tightening the bolts
----End Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-11 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 9 Installing the Main Bracket for the RRU 9 Installing the Main Bracket for the RRU About This Chapter This chapter describes the procedure for installing the main bracket for the DC RRU and AC RRU. Context Figure 9-1 shows the main and auxiliary brackets for the RRU. Figure 9-1 Main and auxiliary brackets for the RRU
(1) Main bracket
(2) Rubber washer
(3) Dual-nut bolt
(4) Auxiliary bracket NOTE If the RRU needs to be installed on the IFS06, only the main bracket is required. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-1 9 Installing the Main Bracket for the RRU DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 9.1 Installing the Main Bracket for the DC RRU This section describes the procedure for installing the main bracket for the DC RRU. Context NOTE l Install RRUs in the sequence from bottom to top and from left to right. l The contact pieces on the main bracket are locked before RRUs are installed. l Rubber washers are easily pressed or broken. l If the installation clearance is limited, the RRU must be first installed on the side where there is the least space. Procedure l Height-unrestricted scenario Install the main bracket in the height-unrestricted scenario, as shown in Figure 9-2. For details about how to install the main bracket, see the labels on the IFS06. Figure 9-2 Installing the main bracket in the height-unrestricted scenario
(1) Spring washer
(2) Rubber washer
(3) Label l Height-restricted scenario Install the main bracket in the height-restricted scenario, as shown in Figure 9-3. For details about how to install the main bracket, see the labels on the IFS06. 9-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide NOTE 9 Installing the Main Bracket for the RRU Before installing the main bracket in the height-restricted scenario, you must use a finger to push the rubber cap out. Figure 9-3 Installing the main bracket in the height-restricted scenario
(1) Spring washer
(2) Rubber washer
(3) Label
----End 9.2 Installing the Main Bracket for the AC RRU This section describes the procedure for installing the main bracket for the AC RRU. Context NOTE l Install RRUs in the sequence from bottom to top and from left to right. l The contact pieces on the main bracket are locked before RRUs are installed. l Rubber washers are easily pressed or broken. l If the installation clearance is limited, the RRU must be first installed on the side where there is the least space. Procedure l Height-unrestricted scenario Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-3 9 Installing the Main Bracket for the RRU DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Install the main bracket in the middle of the bean 1 and the bean 2 respectively in the height-
unrestricted scenario, as shown in Figure 9-4. For details about how to install the main bracket, see the labels on the IFS06. Figure 9-4 Installing the main bracket in the height-unrestricted scenario
(1) Spring washer
(2) Rubber washer
(3) Label l Height-restricted scenario Install the main bracket in the middle of the bean 1 and the bean 2 in the height-restricted scenario, as shown in Figure 9-5. For details about how to install the main bracket, see the labels on the IFS06. 9-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 9 Installing the Main Bracket for the RRU Figure 9-5 Installing the main bracket in the height-restricted scenario
(1) Spring washer
(2) Rubber washer
(3) Label
----End Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-5 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 10 Installing the GPS Surge Protector 10 Installing the GPS Surge Protector This chapter describes the procedure for installing the GPS surge protector. Context Two types of GPS surge protector can be installed on the IFS06, as shown in Figure 10-1. Figure 10-1 GPS surge protector
(1) GPS surge protector A
(2) GPS surge protector B NOTE The IFS06 can be installed with one or two GPS surge protector, which should be decided according to the actual scenario. GPS surge protector does not need a PGND cable. Procedure Step 1 Remove the insert nut and toothed washer from the connector of the GPS clock signal cable, as shown in Figure 10-2. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-1 10 Installing the GPS Surge Protector DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 10-2 Removing the insert nut and toothed washer Step 2 Fix the connector to the adapting piece, as shown in Figure 10-3. Figure 10-3 Installing the connector Step 3 Install the GPS surge protector on the connector, as shown in Figure 10-4. Figure 10-4 Installing the GPS surge protector NOTE When installing the GPS surge protector, pre-tighten it with hands, and then use a wrench to tighten it. Step 4 Install the PGND cable for the GPS surge protector, as shown in Figure 10-5. 10-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 10 Installing the GPS Surge Protector Figure 10-5 Installing the PGND cable for the GPS surge protector Step 5 Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. Step 6 Use cable ties to bind cables. Step 7 Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-3 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 11 Installing the IMB03 11 Installing the IMB03 About This Chapter This chapter describes the procedure for installing the IMB03. 11.1 Installing the IMB03 on the Upper Level Separately This section describes the procedure for installing the IMB03 on the upper level separately. 11.2 Installing the IMB03 on the Lower Level Separately This section describes the procedure for installing the IMB03 on the lower level separately. 11.3 Installing the IMB03s on the Upper and Lower Levels This section describes the procedure for installing the IMB03s on the upper and lower levels. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-1 11 Installing the IMB03 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 11.1 Installing the IMB03 on the Upper Level Separately This section describes the procedure for installing the IMB03 on the upper level separately. Context NOTE In this scenario, only the IMB03 on the upper level needs to be installed. Procedure Step 1 Remove the two protection plates from the top of the IMB03, as shown in Figure 11-1. Figure 11-1 Removing the protection plates NOTE After all the cables are routed, cut parts of the protection plates and use the cut parts to seal the cable holes if there is spare space in the cable holes. Step 2 Install mounting ears horizontally on the IMB03, as shown in Figure 11-2. Figure 11-2 Installing mounting ears horizontally Step 3 Secure the IMB03 to the feet of the ICR, as shown in Figure 11-3. 11-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 11 Installing the IMB03 Figure 11-3 Securing the IMB03 to the feet of the ICR
----End 11.2 Installing the IMB03 on the Lower Level Separately This section describes the procedure for installing the IMB03 on the lower level separately. Context Procedure NOTE In this scenario, only the IMB03 on the lower level needs to be installed. Step 1 Remove the two protection plates from both sides of the IMB03, as shown in Figure 11-4. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-3 11 Installing the IMB03 Figure 11-4 Removing the protection plates DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide NOTE After all the cables are routed, cut parts of the protection plates and use the cut parts to seal the cable holes if there is spare space in the cable holes. Step 2 Install mounting ears vertically on the IMB03, as shown in Figure 11-5. Figure 11-5 Installing mounting ears vertically Step 3 Secure the IMB03 on the feet of the ICR, as shown in Figure 11-6. 11-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 11 Installing the IMB03 Figure 11-6 Securing the IMB03 on the feet of the ICR
----End 11.3 Installing the IMB03s on the Upper and Lower Levels This section describes the procedure for installing the IMB03s on the upper and lower levels. Context NOTE If two IMB03s are required, install an IMB03 on the lower level, and then install the other IMB03 on the upper level. Procedure Step 1 Remove the four protection plates from the lower-level IMB03, as shown in Figure 11-7. Figure 11-7 Removing the protection plates from the lower-level IMB03 Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-5 11 Installing the IMB03 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide NOTE After all the cables are routed, cut parts of the protection plates and use the cut parts to seal the cable holes if there is spare space in the cable holes. Step 2 Install mounting ears vertically on the IMB03, as shown in Figure 11-8. Figure 11-8 Installing mounting ears vertically Step 3 Secure the IMB03 to the feet of the ICR, as shown in Figure 11-9. Figure 11-9 Securing the IMB03 to the feet of the ICR Step 4 Remove the protection plates from the top and bottom of the upper-level IMB03, as shown in Figure 11-10. 11-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 11 Installing the IMB03 Figure 11-10 Removing the protection plates from the upper-level IMB03 Step 5 Install mounting ears horizontally on the upper-level IMB03, as shown in Figure 11-11. Figure 11-11 Installing mounting ears horizontally on the upper-level IMB03 Step 6 Secure the IMB03 to the feet of the ICR, as shown in Figure 11-12. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11-7 11 Installing the IMB03 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 11-12 Securing the IMB03 to the feet of the ICR
----End 11-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 12 Installing the Equipotential Cable and PGND Cable 12 Installing the Equipotential Cable and PGND Cable This chapter describes the procedures for installing the equipotential cable and PGND cable. Context Figure 12-1 shows the installation of the equipotential cable and PGND cable. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12-1 12 Installing the Equipotential Cable and PGND Cable DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 12-1 Installation of the equipotential cable and PGND cable
(1) Ground bar 1
(2) Upper-level IMB03
(3) Lower-level IMB03
(4) Ground bar 2 Procedure Step 1 Connect the PGND cable for the ICR. Step 2 Connect the equipotential cable between the IFS06 and the IMB03. Step 3 Install the equipotential cable between the IMB03s on the upper and lower levels. Cable Id a Cable PGND cable for the ICR Connector OT terminal (16 mm, M8) b Equipotential cable between the IFS06 and the IMB03 OT terminal added based on actual requirement OT terminal (16 mm, M6) Installation Position Ground terminal on ground bar 2 of the IFS06 External ground bar Ground terminal on ground bar 1 of the IFS06 OT terminal (16 mm, M6) Ground terminal on the upper-level IMB03 12-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 12 Installing the Equipotential Cable and PGND Cable Cable Id c Cable Equipotential cable between the IMB03s on the upper and lower levels Connector OT terminal (6 mm, M4) Installation Position Ground terminal on the upper-level IMB03 OT terminal (6 mm, M4) Ground terminal on the lower-level IMB03 Step 4 Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. Step 5 Use cable ties to bind cables. Step 6 Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12-3 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 13 Installing Devices in the IMB03 13 Installing Devices in the IMB03 About This Chapter This chapter describes the installation of the devices in the IMB03. Context Before installing devices, you need to determine the number of IMB03 racks and the devices to be installed in the IMB03 according to 3.2 Installation Options, and then install the devices according to the slot description. Figure 13-1 shows the installation slots of the DCDU-03B, BBU, and power supply system in the IMB03. Figure 13-1 Configurations of the slots in the IMB03
(1) DCDU-03B
(2) BBU
(3) Power equipment Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13-1 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 13 Installing Devices in the IMB03 13.1 Installing the BBU This section describes the procedure for installing the BBU in the IMB03. Procedure Step 1 Install the mounting ears on both sides of the BBU reversely. 1. Remove the mounting ears, as shown in Figure 13-2. Figure 13-2 Removing the mounting ears 2. Install the mounting ears reversely, as shown in Figure 13-3. Figure 13-3 Installing the mounting ears reversely Step 2 Install the BBU into the corresponding slot in the IMB03, and then tighten the four M6x16 bolts on the panel, as shown in Figure 13-4. 13-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 13 Installing Devices in the IMB03 Figure 13-4 Installing the BBU into the slot in the IMB03
----End 13.2 Installing the DCDU-03B This section describes the procedure for installing the DCDU-03B in the IMB03. The cross-section area of the PGND cable for DCDU-03B is 16 mm2. Context Procedure Step 1 Install the DCDU-03B into the corresponding slot in the IMB03, and then tighten the four M6x16 bolts on the panel, as shown in Figure 13-5. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13-3 13 Installing Devices in the IMB03 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 13-5 Installing the DCDU-03B into the slot in the IMB03 Step 2 Install the PGND cable for the DCDU-03B, as shown in Figure 13-6. Figure 13-6 Installing the PGND cable for the DCDU-03B
(1) OT terminal (M4)
----End 13.3 (Optional) Installing the Power Equipment (DC/DC) This section describes the procedure for installing the power equipment (DC/DC) in the IMB03. Context Procedure The installation of the power equipment (DC/DC) is required in the +24 V DC power supply scenario. Step 1 Remove the mounting ears and reinstall them backwards on the power equipment (DC/DC), as shown in Figure 13-7. 13-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 13 Installing Devices in the IMB03 Figure 13-7 Reinstalling the mounting ears Step 2 Install the power equipment (DC/DC) into the corresponding slot in the lower-level IMB03, and then tighten the four M6x16 bolts on the panel, as shown in Figure 13-8. Figure 13-8 Installing the power equipment (DC/DC) in the IMB03 Step 3 Install the PGND cable, as shown in Figure 13-9. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13-5 13 Installing Devices in the IMB03 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 13-9 Installing the PGND cable for the power equipment (DC/DC)
(1) OT terminal (M6)
(2) OT terminal (M4)
----End 13.4 (Optional) Installing the Power Equipment (AC/DC) This section describes the procedure for installing the power equipment (AC/DC) in the IMB03. Context Procedure The installation of the power equipment (AC/DC) is required in the 220 V AC power supply scenario. Step 1 Install the power equipment (AC/DC) into the corresponding slot in the lower-level IMB03, and then tighten the four M6x16 bolts on the panel, as shown in Figure 13-10. 13-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 13 Installing Devices in the IMB03 Figure 13-10 Installing the power equipment (AC/DC) in the IMB03 Step 2 Install the PGND cable for the power equipment (AC/DC), as shown in Figure 13-11. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13-7 13 Installing Devices in the IMB03 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 13-11 Installing the PGND cable for the power equipment (AC/DC)
(1) OT terminal (M6)
----End 13-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 14 Installing the RRU 14 Installing the RRU About This Chapter This section describes the procedure for installing the AC RRU and DC RRU. 14.1 Installing the DC RRU This section describes the procedure for installing the DC RRU. 14.2 Installing the AC RRU This section describes the procedure for installing the AC RRU. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14-1 14 Installing the RRU DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 14.1 Installing the DC RRU This section describes the procedure for installing the DC RRU. Context The procedures for installing the DC RRU in the IFS06+IMB03+RRU scenario and in the IFS06
+RRU scenario are the same. This document takes the IFS06+IMB03+RRU scenario as an example. The procedure for installing the RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3804, RRU3201, or RRU3908 is the same. This document takes the RRU3908 as an example. NOTE l Place the foam pad or cardboard under the RRU to prevent any damage to the housing of the RRU. l The load-bearing capacity of the RF ports at the bottom of the RRU is low. Do not stand the RRU upright. l The screws for securing the adapting piece that are removed from the back of the RRU are reused for installing the adapting piece on the side. l You must remove screws from the side of the RRU3008, RRU3908, or RRU3805 before installing the adapting piece, as shown in Figure 14-2. For other types of RRU, skip the step. Procedure Step 1 Exchange the positions for the adapting piece at the back of the RRU and cover plate on the side of the RRU. 1. Remove the adapting piece at the back of the RRU and cover plate on the side of the RRU, as shown in Figure 14-1. Figure 14-1 Removing the adapting piece and cover plate
(1) Adapting piece
(2) Cover plate 2. Remove the screws, as shown in Figure 14-2. 14-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 14 Installing the RRU Figure 14-2 Removing the screws 3. Reinstall the adapting piece and cover plate on the RRU, as shown in Figure 14-3. Figure 14-3 Reinstalling the adapting piece and cover plate Step 2 Link the M6 OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable to the wiring terminal at the bottom of the RRU, and leave the other end idle, as shown in Figure 14-4. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14-3 14 Installing the RRU DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 14-4 Connecting the PGND cable for the RRU to the wiring terminal at the bottom Step 3 Install the RRU on the main bracket, as shown in Figure 14-5. Figure 14-5 Installing the RRU on the main bracket 14-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 14 Installing the RRU CAUTION Do not step on the IMB03 during the RRU installation. Step 4 Repeat Step 1, Step 2, and Step 3 to install three RRUs, six RRUs, or 12 RRUs, as shown in Figure 14-6. Figure 14-6 Installing six RRUs
----End 14.2 Installing the AC RRU This section describes the procedure for installing the AC RRU. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14-5 14 Installing the RRU Context NOTE DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide l Place the foam pad or cardboard under the RRU to prevent any damage to the housing of the RRU. l The load-bearing capacity of the RF ports at the bottom of the RRU is low. Do not stand the RRU upright. Procedure Step 1 Link the M6 OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable to the wiring terminal at the bottom of the RRU, and leave the other end idle, as shown in Figure 14-7. Figure 14-7 Connecting the PGND cable for the RRU to the wiring terminal at the bottom Step 2 Install the AC RRU on the main bracket, as shown in Figure 14-8. 14-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 14 Installing the RRU Figure 14-8 Installing the AC RRU on the main bracket NOTE Install the AC RRU on the lower level before installing the RRU on the upper level.
----End Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14-7 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables 15 Installing Cables About This Chapter This chapter describes the procedure for installing all the cables. 15.1 Cabling Requirements Route cables according to the specified cabling requirements to prevent signal interference. 15.2 Cable Connections This section describes the cable connections in different scenarios. 15.3 Cable Installation Process This section describes the process of installing the ICR-related cables. 15.4 Cable Routes This section describes the cable routes. 15.5 Installing the PGND Cable for the RRU This section describes the procedure for installing the PGND cable for the RRU. 15.6 Installing the Power Cable for the BBU This section describes the installation of the power cable for the BBU. 15.7 Installing the Input Power Cable This section describes the installation of the input power cable. 15.8 (Optional) Installing the Power Cable and Monitoring Signal Cable for the DCDU This section describes the procedure for installing the power cable and monitoring signal cable. 15.9 Installing the Power Cable for the RRU This section describes the installation of the power cable for the RRU. 15.10 Installing the E1/T1 Cable (FE/GE Cable or FE/GE Optical Cable) This section describes the installation of the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, and FE/GE optical cable. The FE/GE cable and FE/GE optical cable are optional. The following description is based on the installation of the E1/T1 cable. 15.11 Installing the CPRI Optical Cable This section describes the procedure for installing the CPRI optical cable. 15.12 Installing the Antenna Jumper for the RRU Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-1 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide This section describes the procedure for installing the antenna jumper for the DC RRU. 15.13 Installing a GPS Clock Signal Cable This section describes the procedure for installing the GPS clock signal cable. 15-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables 15.1 Cabling Requirements Route cables according to the specified cabling requirements to prevent signal interference. NOTE If a cable listed below is not required, skip the routing of the cable. General Cabling Requirements The bending radius of the cables must meet the following specifications:
l The bending radius of the 7/8'' feeder must be more than 250 mm (9.84 in.), and the bending radius of the 5/4'' feeder must be more than 380 mm (14.96 in.). l The bending radius of the 1/4'' jumper must be more than 35 mm (1.38 in.). The bending radius of the super-flexible 1/2'' jumper must be more than 50 mm (1.97 in.), and the bending radius of the ordinary 1/2'' jumper must be more than 127 mm (5 in.). l The bending radius of the power cable or PGND cable must be at least five times the diameter of the cable. l The bending radius of the optical fiber must be at least 20 times the diameter of the optical fiber. l The bending radius of the E1/T1 cable must be at least five times the diameter of the cable. l The bending radius of the signal cable must be at least five times the diameter of the cable. The cables must be bound as follows:
l Different types of cables must be separately routed and cannot be entangled. l The cables must be bound tightly and neatly. The sheaths of the cables must not be damaged. l The cable ties must face the same direction, and those at the same horizontal line must be in a straight line. Extra length of cable ties must be cut. l Labels or nameplates must be attached to the cables after they are installed. The cables must be routed as follows:
l Different types of cables must be separately routed with a minimum space of 30 mm (1.18 in.) between every two cables. l Different types of cables must be installed in an untangled and orderly fashion. l Different types of cables must be routed in parallel or separated by special objects. Special Cabling Requirements Cabling requirements for power cables are as follows:
l -48 V DC power cables must be bound together. l +24 V DC power cables must be bound together. l Power cables, transmission cables, and signal cables are routed separately. l Multiple power cables must be bound when routed. l Power cables must be installed in the position specified in engineering design documents. l If the length of power cables is insufficient, replace the cables rather than adding connectors or soldering joints to lengthen the cables. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-3 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Cabling requirements for PGND cables are as follows:
l PGND cables for the base station must be connected to the same ground bar. l PGND cables must be buried in the ground or routed indoors. They should not be routed overhead before they are led into the equipment room. l The exterior of the coaxial wire and the shield layer of the shielded cable must have proper electrical contact with the metal surface of the equipment to which they are connected. l PGND cables and signal cables must be installed in an untangled and orderly fashion. A certain distance must be reserved between them to prevent interference from each other. l Fuses or switches must not be installed on the PGND cables. l Other devices must not be used for electrical connections of the PGND cables. l All the metal parts in the housing of the equipment must be reliably connected to the ground terminal. Cabling requirements for E1 cables are as follows:
l E1 cables must not cross power cables, PGND cables, or RF cables when routed. If transmission cables are routed with power cables, PGND cables, or RF cables in parallel, the spacing between them must be greater than 30 mm (1.18 in.). l E1 cables are routed straightly and bound neatly with cable ties. l Sufficient slack is provided in E1 cables at turns. Cabling requirements for optical fibers are as follows:
l Do not stretch, step on, or place heavy objects on optical fibers. Keep the fibers away from sharp objects. l When optical fibers are routed, the extra length of the fibers must be coiled around special devices, such as a fiber coiler. l When coiling optical fibers, apply even strength. Do not bend the fibers with force. l Vacant optical connectors must be covered with dustproof caps. 15.2 Cable Connections This section describes the cable connections in different scenarios. 15.2.1 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3008s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with six RRU3008s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. 15.2.2 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3804s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with six RRU3804s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. 15.2.3 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3201s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with six RRU3201s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. 15.2.4 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3908s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with six RRU3908s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. 15.2.5 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Three RRU3908s+Three RRU3804s) 15-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables This section describes all the cable connections in the dual-mode and triple-mode scenarios when three RRU3908s and three RRU3804s are configured and the -48 V DC power supply is provided. 15.2.6 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Three RRU3008s+Three RRU3804s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with three RRU3008s and three RRU3804s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. 15.2.7 Cable Connections (-48 V, Three RRU3908s + Three RRU3201s) This section describes all the cable connections in the dual-mode and triple-mode scenarios when three RRU3908s and three RRU3201s are configured and the -48 V DC power supply is provided. 15.2.8 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Three RRU3008s+Three RRU3201s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with three RRU3008s and three RRU3201s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. 15.2.9 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Three RRU3804s+Three RRU3201s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with three RRU3804s and three RRU3201s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. 15.2.10 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3008s+Six RRU3804s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with six RRU3008s and six RRU3804s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. 15.2.11 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3908s+Six RRU3804s) This section describes all the cable connections in the dual-mode and triple-mode scenarios when six RRU3908s and six RRU3804s are configured and the -48 V DC power supply is provided. 15.2.12 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3908s+Six RRU3201s) This section describes all the cable connections in the dual-mode and triple-mode scenarios when six RRU3908s and six RRU3201s are configured and the -48 V DC power supply is provided. 15.2.13 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3008s+Six RRU3201s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with six RRU3008s and six RRU3201s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. 15.2.14 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3804s+Six RRU3201s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with six RRU3804s and six RRU3201s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. 15.2.15 Cable Connections (AC RRU) This section describes all the cable connections for the only one RRU configured in a base station with AC power supply. 15.2.16 Cable Connections (220 V AC) This section describes the cable connections for the power equipment (AC/DC) in a base station with 220 V AC power supply. 15.2.17 Cable Connections (+24 V DC) This section describes the cable connections for the power equipment (DC/DC) in a base station with +24 V DC power supply. 15.2.1 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3008s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with six RRU3008s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 15-1 shows the cable connections. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-5 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 15-1 Cable connections (-48 V DC, six RRU3008s) Table 15-1 describes the cables. Table 15-1 Cable description Power cable Jumper CPRI cable PGND cable GPS clock signal cable E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable 15-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide NOTE 15 Installing Cables The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to the on-site requirements. 15.2.2 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3804s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with six RRU3804s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 15-2 shows the cable connections. Figure 15-2 Cable connections (-48 V DC, six RRU3804s) Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-7 15 Installing Cables Table 15-2 describes the cables. Table 15-2 Cable description Power cable CPRI cable Jumper PGND cable DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide GPS clock signal cable E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to the on-site requirements. 15.2.3 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3201s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with six RRU3201s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 15-3 shows the cable connections. 15-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-3 Cable connections (-48 V DC, six RRU3201s) Table 15-3 describes the cables. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-9 15 Installing Cables Table 15-3 Cable description Power cable CPRI cable Jumper PGND cable DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide GPS clock signal cable E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE Only an optical cable or Ethernet cable can be connected to a GE port on the LMPT. 15.2.4 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3908s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with six RRU3908s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 15-4 shows the cable connections. 15-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-4 Cable connections (-48 V DC, six RRU3908s) Table 15-4 describes the cables. Table 15-4 Cable description Power cable CPRI cable Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. GPS clock signal cable 15-11 15 Installing Cables Jumper PGND cable DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to the on-site requirements. 15.2.5 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Three RRU3908s+Three RRU3804s) This section describes all the cable connections in the dual-mode and triple-mode scenarios when three RRU3908s and three RRU3804s are configured and the -48 V DC power supply is provided. Cable Connections in the Dual-Mode Scenario Figure 15-5 shows the cable connections in the dual-mode scenario. 15-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-5 Cable connections in the dual-mode scenario (-48 V, three RRU3908s + three RRU3804s) Table 15-5 lists the cables. Table 15-5 Cable description Power cable CPRI optical cable Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. GPS clock signal cable 15-13 15 Installing Cables Jumper PGND Cable DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to the on-site requirements. Cable Connections in the Triple-Mode Scenario Figure 15-6 shows cable connections in the triple-mode scenario. 15-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-6 Cable Connections in triple-mode scenario (-48 V DC, Three RRU3908s + Three RRU3804s) Table 15-6 lists the cables. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-15 15 Installing Cables Table 15-6 Cable description Power cable Jumper CPRI optical cable PGND Cable DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide GPS clock signal cable E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to on-site requirements. 15.2.6 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Three RRU3008s+Three RRU3804s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with three RRU3008s and three RRU3804s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 15-7 shows the cable connections. 15-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-7 Cable connections (-48 V DC, three RRU3008s+three RRU3804s) Table 15-7 describes the cables. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-17 15 Installing Cables Table 15-7 Cable description Power cable CPRI cable Jumper PGND cable DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide GPS clock signal cable E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to the on-site requirements. 15.2.7 Cable Connections (-48 V, Three RRU3908s + Three RRU3201s) This section describes all the cable connections in the dual-mode and triple-mode scenarios when three RRU3908s and three RRU3201s are configured and the -48 V DC power supply is provided. Cable Connections in the Dual-Mode Scenario Figure 15-8 shows the cable connections in the dual-mode scenario. 15-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-8 Cable connections in the dual-mode scenario (-48 V, three RRU3908s + three RRU3201s) Table 15-8 lists the cables. Table 15-8 Cable description Power cable CPRI optical cable GPS clock signal cable Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-19 15 Installing Cables Jumper PGND cable DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to on-site requirements. Only an optical cable or Ethernet cable can be connected to a GE port on the LMPT. Cable Connections in the Triple-Mode Scenario Figure 15-9 shows cable connections in the triple-mode scenario. 15-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-9 Cable connections in the triple-mode scenario (-48 V, three RRU3908s + three RRU3201s) Table 15-9 lists the cables. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-21 15 Installing Cables Table 15-9 Cable description Power cable Jumper CPRI optical cable PGND cable DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide GPS clock signal cable E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to on-site requirements. Only an optical cable or Ethernet cable can be connected to a GE port on the LMPT. 15.2.8 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Three RRU3008s+Three RRU3201s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with three RRU3008s and three RRU3201s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 15-10 shows the cable connections. 15-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-10 Cable connections (-48 V DC, three RRU3008s+three RRU3201s) Table 15-10 describes the cables. Table 15-10 Cable description Power cable CPRI cable GPS clock signal cable Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-23 15 Installing Cables Jumper PGND cable DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to the on-site requirements. Only an optical cable or Ethernet cable can be connected to a GE port on the LMPT. 15.2.9 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Three RRU3804s+Three RRU3201s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with three RRU3804s and three RRU3201s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 15-11 shows the cable connections. 15-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-11 Cable connections (-48 V DC, three RRU3804s+three RRU3201s) Table 15-11 describes the cables. Table 15-11 Cable description Power cable CPRI cable Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. GPS clock signal cable 15-25 15 Installing Cables Jumper PGND cable DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to the on-site requirements. Only an optical cable or Ethernet cable can be connected to a GE port on the LMPT. 15.2.10 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3008s+Six RRU3804s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with six RRU3008s and six RRU3804s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 15-12 shows the cable connections. 15-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-12 Cable connections (-48 V DC, six RRU3008s+six RRU3804s) Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-27 15 Installing Cables Table 15-12 describes the cables. Table 15-12 Cable description Power cable CPRI cable Jumper PGND cable DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide GPS clock signal cable E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to the on-site requirements. 15.2.11 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3908s+Six RRU3804s) This section describes all the cable connections in the dual-mode and triple-mode scenarios when six RRU3908s and six RRU3804s are configured and the -48 V DC power supply is provided. Cable Connections in the Dual-Mode Scenario Figure 15-13 shows the cable connections in the dual-mode scenario. 15-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-13 Cable connections in the dual-mode scenario (-48 V, six RRU3908s + six RRU3804s) Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-29 15 Installing Cables Table 15-13 lists the cables. Table 15-13 Cable description Power cable Jumper CPRI optical cable PGND cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to on-site requirements. DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide GPS clock signal cable E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable Cable Connections in the Triple-Mode Scenario The cable connections in the triple-mode scenario consists of GSM+LTE and UMTS Only cable connections, as shown in Figure 15-14 and Figure 15-15. 15-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-14 Cable connections in the GSM+LTE scenario (-48 V, six RRU3908s) Table 15-14 lists the cables. Table 15-14 Cable description Power cable CPRI optical cable GPS clock signal cable Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-31 15 Installing Cables Jumper PGND cable DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to on-site requirements. Only an optical cable or Ethernet cable can be connected to a GE port on the LMPT. Figure 15-15 Cable connections in the UMTS Only scenario (-48 V, six RRU3804s) 15-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 15-15 lists the cables. Table 15-15 Cable description Power cable Jumper CPRI optical cable PGND cable 15 Installing Cables GPS clock signal cable E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to on-site requirements. 15.2.12 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3908s+Six RRU3201s) This section describes all the cable connections in the dual-mode and triple-mode scenarios when six RRU3908s and six RRU3201s are configured and the -48 V DC power supply is provided. Cable Connections in the Dual-Mode Scenario Figure 15-16 shows the cable connections in the dual-mode scenario. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-33 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 15-16 Cable connections in the dual-mode scenario (-48 V, six RRU3908s + six RRU3201s) 15-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 15-16 lists the cables. Table 15-16 Cable description Power cable Jumper CPRI optical cable PGND cable 15 Installing Cables GPS clock signal cable E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to on-site requirements. Only an optical cable or Ethernet cable can be connected to a GE port on the LMPT. Cable Connections in the Triple-Mode Scenario The cable connections in the triple-mode scenario consists of GSM+UMTS and LTE Only cable connections, as shown in Figure 15-17 and Figure 15-18. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-35 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 15-17 Cable connections in the GSM+UMTS Only scenario (-48 V DC, six RRU3908s) Table 15-17 lists the cables. Table 15-17 Cable description Power cable CPRI optical cable GPS clock signal cable 15-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Jumper PGND cable 15 Installing Cables E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to on-site requirements. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-37 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 15-18 Cable connections in the LTE Only scenario (-48 V DC, six RRU3201s) Table 15-18 lists the cables. 15-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 15-18 Cable description Power cable Jumper CPRI optical cable PGND cable 15 Installing Cables GPS clock signal cable E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE Only an optical cable or Ethernet cable can be connected to a GE port on the LMPT. 15.2.13 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3008s+Six RRU3201s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with six RRU3008s and six RRU3201s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 15-19 shows the cable connections. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-39 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 15-19 Cable connections (-48 V DC, six RRU3008s+six RRU3201s) Table 15-19 describes the cables. 15-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 15-19 Cable description Power cable CPRI cable Jumper PGND cable 15 Installing Cables GPS clock signal cable E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to the on-site requirements. Only an optical cable or Ethernet cable can be connected to a GE port on the LMPT. 15.2.14 Cable Connections (-48 V DC, Six RRU3804s+Six RRU3201s) This section describes all the cable connections in a base station configured with six RRU3804s and six RRU3201s in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 15-20 shows the cable connections. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-41 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 15-20 Cable connections (-48 V DC, six RRU3804s+six RRU3201s) Table 15-20 describes the cables. 15-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 15-20 Cable description Power cable CPRI cable Jumper PGND cable 15 Installing Cables GPS clock signal cable E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable NOTE The E1/T1 cable or FE/GE cable is used according to the on-site requirements. Only an optical cable or Ethernet cable can be connected to a GE port on the LMPT. 15.2.15 Cable Connections (AC RRU) This section describes all the cable connections for the only one RRU configured in a base station with AC power supply. Figure 15-21 shows the cable connections. Figure 15-21 Cable connections (AC RRU) Table 15-21 describes the cables. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-43 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Table 15-21 Cable description SN a b c d e f g h i j k Cable Monitoring signal cable for the AC RRU CPRI optical cable Power cable for the DC RRU Inter-RRU RF signal cable AISG multi-wire cable for the RRU RF jumper for the RRU Feeder Extended AISG cable for the RRU PGND cable Power cable for the AC RRU Equipotential cable 15.2.16 Cable Connections (220 V AC) This section describes the cable connections for the power equipment (AC/DC) in a base station with 220 V AC power supply. NOTE The cable connections for the RRUs in the 220 V AC and -48 V DC power supply scenarios are the same. For details, see 15.2 Cable Connections. Figure 15-22 shows the cable connections. 15-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-22 Cable connections (220 V AC) 15.2.17 Cable Connections (+24 V DC) This section describes the cable connections for the power equipment (DC/DC) in a base station with +24 V DC power supply. NOTE The cable connections for the RRUs in the +24 V DC and -48 V DC power supply scenarios are the same. For details, see 15.2 Cable Connections. Figure 15-23 shows the cable connections. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-45 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-23 Cable connections (+24 V DC) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15.3 Cable Installation Process This section describes the process of installing the ICR-related cables. Process of Installing the ICR-Related Cables Figure 15-24 shows the cable installation process. 15-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-24 Process of installing the ICR-related cables 15.4 Cable Routes This section describes the cable routes. Figure 15-25 shows the plan view of the cable rack. By studying the figure, you can know the cable routes. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-47 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-25 Cable routes DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide
(1) -48 V DC or 220 V AC input power cable (2) Optical cable and PGND cable for the RRU in the lower part
(3) Feeder
(4) Power cable for the RRU and E1 cable
(5) +24 V DC input power cable
-
15.5 Installing the PGND Cable for the RRU This section describes the procedure for installing the PGND cable for the RRU. Context Procedure The cross-section area of the PGND cable for the RRU is 16 mm2. l Installing the PGND cable for the DC RRU 1. Prepare the PGND cable.
(1) Cut the cables to proper lengths based on the actual cable route.
(2) Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable. 2. Connect one end of the PGND cable to the RRU. 3. Connect the other end to the ground bar on the IFS06. NOTE When installing the PGND cable, keep the crimping tube of the OT terminal in the correct direction. 15-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-26 Connections of the PGND cables for the DC RRU 4. Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. 5. Use cable ties to bind cables. 6. Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching a Sign Plate Label. l Installing the PGND cable for the AC RRU 1. Prepare the PGND cable.
(1) Cut the cables to proper lengths based on the actual cable route.
(2) Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable. 2. Connect one end of the PGND cable to the RRU. 3. Connect the other end to the ground bar on the IFS06. NOTE When installing the PGND cable, keep the crimping tube of the OT terminal in the correct direction. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-49 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 15-27 Connections of the PGND cables for the AC RRU 4. Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. 5. Use cable ties to bind cables. 6.
----End Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching a Sign Plate Label. 15.6 Installing the Power Cable for the BBU This section describes the installation of the power cable for the BBU. Context Procedure The cross-section area of the power cable for the BBU is 1.5 mm2. Step 1 Add an OT terminal to the power cable for the BBU. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. 15-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables NOTE The 3V3 power connector is added to the power cable for the BBU before delivery, and you must add OT terminals at the other end. Step 2 Install the power cable for the BBU, as shown in Figure 15-28. 1. 2. Link the 3V3 power connector at one end of the power cable for the BBU to the PWR port on the UPEU in the BBU, and then tighten the screws on the connector until the tightening torque reaches 0.25 Nm. Link the OT terminals on the blue and black wires at the other end to the wiring terminals labeled NEG(-) and RTN(+) near the LOAD6 label on the DCDU-03B respectively. Figure 15-28 Installing the power cable for the BBU Step 3 Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. Step 4 Use cable ties to bind cables. Step 5 Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End 15.7 Installing the Input Power Cable This section describes the installation of the input power cable. Context You must select the corresponding procedure according to the types of input power cable, which are -48 V DC, +24 V DC, and 220 V AC input power cables. The cross-section area of the input power cable is as follows:
l 16 mm2 for -48 V DC. l 25 mm2 for +24 V DC. l 6 mm2 for 220 V AC three-phase. l 2.5 mm2 for 220 V AC single-phase. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-51 15 Installing Cables Procedure DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide l Installing the -48 V DC input power cable 1. Prepare the power cable.
(1) Cut the cable to the required length based on the actual cable route.
(2) Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable. 2. Connect one end of the power cable to the wiring terminals labeled RTN(+) and NEG
(-) on the DCDU-03B, as shown in 2 of Figure 15-29. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external power equipment after routing the cable along the cable trough at the left-back of the IFS06, as shown in 1 of Figure 15-29. 4. Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. 5. Use cable ties to bind cables. 6. Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching an L-Shaped Label. l Installing the +24 V DC input power cable 1. Prepare the power cable.
(1) Cut the cable to the required length based on the actual cable route.
(2) Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable. 2. Connect one end of the power cable to the wiring terminals labeled + and - on the power equipment (DC/DC), as shown in 6 of Figure 15-29. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external power equipment after routing the cable along the cable trough at the left-back of the IFS06, as shown in 1 of Figure 15-29. 4. Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. 5. Use cable ties to bind cables. 6. Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching an L-Shaped Label. l Installing the 220 V AC input power cable 1. Prepare the power cable.
(1) Cut the cable to the required length based on the actual cable route.
(2) Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable. 2. Connect one end of the power cable to the port labeled RS232/RS485 on the power equipment (AC/DC), as shown in 5 of Figure 15-29. For details about the connections of the 220 V AC single-phase input power cable, see 3 in Figure 15-29. For details about the connections of the 220 V AC three-phase input power cable, see 4 in Figure 15-29. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external power equipment after routing the cable along the cable trough at the left-back of the IFS06, as shown in 1 of Figure 15-29. 4. Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. 5. Use cable ties to bind cables. 6. Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching a Sign Plate Label. 15-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-29 Installing the input power cable
(1) Back view
(2) Input power cable for the DCDU
(3) Connections of the 220 V AC single-phase input power cable
(4) Connections of the 220 V AC three-phase input power cable
(5) Input power cable for the power equipment (AC/DC)
(6) Input power cable for the power equipment (DC/DC)
----End Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-53 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15.8 (Optional) Installing the Power Cable and Monitoring Signal Cable for the DCDU This section describes the procedure for installing the power cable and monitoring signal cable. Context Procedure The cross-section area of the power cable for the DCDU is 25 mm2. In the 220 V AC and +24 V DC power supply scenario, the power cable needs to be installed between the power equipment and the DCDU, and the monitoring signal cable needs to be installed between the power equipment and the BBU. NOTE In the -48 V DC power supply scenario, the power cable is connected to the DCDU directly, and the monitoring signal cable is connected to the BBU directly. l Installing the power cable and monitoring signal cable for the DCDU in the +24 V DC power supply scenario 1. Prepare the power cable.
(1) Cut the cable to the required length based on the actual cable route.
(2) Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable. 2. Connect one end of the power cable to the wiring terminals labeled LOAD(-) and RTN(+) on the power equipment (DC/DC). 3. Connect the other end to the wiring terminals labeled NEG(-) and RTN(+) on the DCDU. 4. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU to the ALM0 port on the UPEU. 5. Connect the other end to the ALM port on the power equipment (DC/DC). 6. Connect one end of the in-position signal cable for the PSU to the ALM1 port on the UPEU. 7. Connect the other end to the PRESENT port on the power equipment (DC/DC). The red cable in Figure 15-30 is the power cable, and the blue cable is the monitoring signal cable. 15-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-30 Installing the power cable and monitoring signal cable (+24 V DC)
(1) In-position signal cable for the PSU
(2) Monitoring signal cable for the PSU
(3) Power cable for the DCDU 8. Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. 9. Use cable ties to bind cables. 10. Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching an L-Shaped Label. l Installing the power cable and monitoring signal cable for the DCDU in the 220 V AC power supply scenario 1. Prepare the power cable.
(1) Cut the cable to the required length based on the actual cable route.
(2) Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable. 2. Connect one end of the power cable to the wiring terminals labeled LOAD1(-)/
LOAD2(-) and RTN(+) on the power equipment (AC/DC). 3. Connect the other end to the wiring terminals labeled NEG(-) and RTN(+) on the DCDU. 4. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU. 5. Connect the other end to the RS232/RS485 port on the power equipment (AC/DC). The red cable in Figure 15-31 is the power cable, and the blue cable is the monitoring signal cable. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-55 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 15-31 Installing the power cable and monitoring signal cable (220 V AC) 6. Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. 7. Use cable ties to bind cables. 8.
----End Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching an L-Shaped Label. 15.9 Installing the Power Cable for the RRU This section describes the installation of the power cable for the RRU. Context Procedure l The cross-section area of the power cable for the DC RRU is 3.3 mm2, which complies with the North American standard. l The cross-section area of the power cable for the DC RRU is 4 mm2, which complies with the European standard. l Installing the power cable for the DC RRU 1. Prepare the power cable.
(1) Cut the cable to the required length based on the actual cable route. 15-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 2. 15 Installing Cables
(2) Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable. Link the OT terminal of the blue power cable for the DC RRU to the NEG(-)0 port in the cabling cavity of the RRU. Link the OT terminal of the black cable to the RTN(+)0 port. 3. 4. Connect the other end of the power cable for the DC RRU to the LOAD0 to LOAD5 port on the DCDU. CAUTION The OT terminals are linked differently for different types of RRU. For details, see Figure 15-32. Figure 15-32 Connections of the power cable for the DC RRU
(1) OT terminals bent by 90 TIP Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-57 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide It is recommended that the OT terminals on the power cable for the RRU be installed on the DCDU in the sequence from right to left. 5. Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. 6. Use cable ties to bind cables. CAUTION When routing the power cable for the RRU on the top of the IMB03, ensure that the holes for heat dissipation are not covered. 7. Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching a Sign Plate Label. l Installing the power cable for the AC RRU 1. Connect one end of the input power cable to the AC IN port at the bottom of the AC RRU. 2. Connect the other end to the external power equipment. Figure 15-33 shows the cable route. 15-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-33 Connections of the power cable for the AC RRU
(1) Cable tie 3. Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. 4. Use cable ties to bind cables. 5.
----End Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching a Sign Plate Label. 15.10 Installing the E1/T1 Cable (FE/GE Cable or FE/GE Optical Cable) This section describes the installation of the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, and FE/GE optical cable. The FE/GE cable and FE/GE optical cable are optional. The following description is based on the installation of the E1/T1 cable. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-59 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide One end of the FE/GE cable is connected to the FE0 port on the WMPT/GTMU or FE/GE port on the LMPT, and one end of the FE/GE optical cable is connected to the SFP port on the LMPT. The cable route of the FE/GE cable or FE/GE optical cable is the same as that of E1/T1 cable. 15 Installing Cables Context Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cable to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or GTMU. Step 2 Lead the other end out of the IMB03 from the top right, as shown in Figure 15-34. Figure 15-34 Connections of the E1/T1 cable Step 3 Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. 15-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Step 4 Use cable ties to bind cables. Step 5 Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End 15.11 Installing the CPRI Optical Cable This section describes the procedure for installing the CPRI optical cable. Context Procedure l The single-mode optical module is labeled "SM" and multi-mode optical module is labeled
"MM". l If the puller of an optical module is blue, the module is a single-mode optical module. If the puller of an optical module is black or grey, the module is a multi-mode optical module. l The optical module to be installed must have a matching rate with the corresponding CPRI port. l Installing the CPRI optical cable for the DC RRU 1. Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. 2. Turn the puller of each optical module outwards, insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the BBU and the CPRI_W or CPRI0 port on the RRU respectively, and then turn the puller inwards, as shown in Figure 15-35. Figure 15-35 Installing the optical module 3. Connect one end of the CPRI optical cable to the CPRI_W port on the RRU. 4. Connect the other end to the CPRI port on the BBU. 5. Route the optical cable in the cable trough by referring to Figure 15-36. CAUTION l When routing optical cables, coil the cables and place them on the top center of the upper-level IMB03 to ensure that the holes for heat dissipation are not covered. l The minimum bending radius of the fiber is 140 mm. When coiling the optical cable, do not bend it excessively. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-61 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 15-36 Connections of the CPRI optical cable for six DC RRUs
(1) Cable routes for 6 DC RRUs
(2) Every three optical cables tied in a bundle The cable route of the CPRI optical cable for 12 DC RRUs are slightly different. For details, see Figure 15-37. 15-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-37 Connections of the CPRI optical cable for 12 DC RRUs
(1) Cable routes for 12 DC RRUs
(2) Every three optical cables tied in a bundle 6. Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. 7. Use cable ties to bind cables. 8. Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching an L-Shaped Label. l Installing the CPRI optical cable for the AC RRU 1. Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. 2. Turn the puller of each optical module outwards, insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the BBU and the CPRI_W or CPRI0 port on the RRU respectively, and then turn the puller inwards, as shown in Figure 15-38. Figure 15-38 Installing the optical module 3. Connect one end of the CPRI optical cable to the cabling cavity of the RRU, as shown in Figure 15-39. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-63 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 15-39 Connections of the CPRI optical cable for AC RRUs
(1) CPRI optical cable 4. Connect the other end to the CPRI port on the BBU. 5. Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. 6. Use cable ties to bind cables. 7.
----End Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching an L-Shaped Label. 15.12 Installing the Antenna Jumper for the RRU This section describes the procedure for installing the antenna jumper for the DC RRU. 15-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Context Procedure 15 Installing Cables CAUTION l Fix a DIN connector near the cable rack before fixing another DIN connector far from the cable rack when installing the antenna jumper for the DC RRU. Pre-bend the RF jumper before connecting it to the RRU. l The three wire clips in the middle of the cable trough are used for routing feeders. Each wire clip holds four feeders. You must install the feeders on the lower level before installing the feeders on the upper level. l The minimum bending radius of the antenna jumper is 100 mm. l When the STMA or Smart Bias-Tee (SBT) is used and the coaxial cable is used for the RET antenna of the RRU3201, OOK signals are required. In this case, the ANT_TX/RXA port is used for communications of the RET antenna. l Installing the antenna jumper for the DC RRU 1. Connect one end of the antenna jumper to the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_RXB ports at the bottom of the RRU. 2. Connect the other end to the feeder or antenna, as shown in Figure 15-40. TIP Pre-bend the feeder before tightening the feeder connector. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-65 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 15-40 Connections of the antenna jumper for the DC RRU 3. Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. 4. Use cable ties to bind cables. 5. Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching a Sign Plate Label. l Installing the antenna jumper for the AC RRU 1. Connect one end of the antenna jumper to the ANTA and ANTB ports at the bottom of the RRU. 2. Connect the other end to the feeder or antenna, as shown in Figure 15-41. TIP Pre-bend the feeder before tightening the feeder connector. 15-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 15 Installing Cables Figure 15-41 Connections of the antenna jumper for the AC RRU 3. Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. 4. Use cable ties to bind cables. 5. Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End 15.13 Installing a GPS Clock Signal Cable This section describes the procedure for installing the GPS clock signal cable. Procedure Step 1 Connect the other end of the GPS clock signal cable to the GPS port on the USCU, orLMPT NOTE The GPS clock signal cable is connected to the GPS port on the USCU for a base station working in GSM Only, UMTS Only, or GSM+UMTS mode. It is connected to the GPS port on the LMPT for a base station working in LTE Only, UMTS+LTE, or GSM+LTE mode. The route for the GPS clock signal cable is the same when the cable is connected to theLMPT, or USCU. Figure 15-42 shows the connections of the GPS clock signal cable to the GPS port on the USCU. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15-67 15 Installing Cables DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Figure 15-42 shows the installation of the GPS clock signal cable. Figure 15-42 GPS clock signal cable
(1) GPS clock signal cable Step 2 Route cables by referring to 15.1 Cabling Requirements. Step 3 Use cable ties to bind cables. Step 4 Label the installed cables by referring to Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End 15-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 16 Checklist for the DBS3900 Hardware Installation 16 Checklist for the DBS3900 Hardware Installation This section describes the checklist for the DBS3900 hardware installation. Table 16-1 Hardware installation checklist No. 1 Item The position for each equipment conforms to the engineering design and meets the space requirement. Sufficient space is reserved for equipment maintenance. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 The BBU, RRU, and auxiliary devices are securely installed, and all the screws are tightened. The DIP switch on the BBU is correctly set. The cover plate is securely installed on the cabling cavity of the RRU. Waterproof fillers are installed in the idle cable troughs of the cabling cavity of the RRU, and the cover plate of the cabling cavity is securely installed. In addition, the idle RF ports are covered with waterproof caps and waterproofed. All the power cables and PGND cables are not short-circuited or reversely connected. In addition, no damaged or broken parts exist. There are no connectors or joints on the power cable or PGND cable. Tightly press the OT terminal on the conductor when adding the OT terminal to the power cable or PGND cable. The bare wire and OT terminal at the wiring terminal are tightly wrapped with the insulation tape or heat-shrinkable tube. The working grounding and protection grounding of the base station and the surge protection grounding of the building share one group of grounding conductors. The connector of the signal cable is intact, and no damaged or broken parts exist on the cable. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16-1 16 Checklist for the DBS3900 Hardware Installation DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide No. 12 13 Item The distance between the bundled fiber and the BBU panel is between 40 mm and 70 mm. Labels are correct, legible, and complete on both ends of each cable. 16-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 17 Performing the DBS3900 Power-On Check 17 Performing the DBS3900 Power-On Check After all devices are installed, you need to check the power-on status of the BBU and RRU. CAUTION l The DBS3900 must be powered on within seven days after it is unpacked, and the period for which the DBS3900 remains powered-off during maintenance must not exceed 48 hours. l The RRU must be powered on within 24 hours after it is unpacked, and the period for which the RRU remains powered-off during maintenance must not exceed 24 hours. Checking the Power-On Status of the BBU Figure 17-1 shows the BBU power-on check process. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17-1 17 Performing the DBS3900 Power-On Check Figure 17-1 BBU power-on check process DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide Checking the Power-On Status of the RRU Figure 17-2 shows the RRU power-on check process. 17-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 17 Performing the DBS3900 Power-On Check Figure 17-2 RRU power-on check process Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17-3 DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide 18 Installing the Cover Plate for the IMB03 18 Installing the Cover Plate for the IMB03 This section describes the procedure for installing the cover plate for the IMB03. Procedure Step 1 Fit the tabs on the cover plate into the slots in the IMB03, as shown in Figure 18-1. Figure 18-1 Installing the cover plate Step 2 Tighten the M38 bolt on the left of the cover plate for the IMB03 until the tightening torque reaches 0.3 Nm using a Phillips torque screwdriver, as shown in Figure 18-2. Issue 01 (2011-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18-1 18 Installing the Cover Plate for the IMB03 Figure 18-2 Securing the cover plate DBS3900(ICR) Installation Guide
----End 18-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-03-30)
1 | Compliance and Safety Manual | Users Manual | 441.65 KiB | August 08 2014 |
RRU3256 Compliance and Safety Manual Issue Date 01 2012-12-13 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Doc. Code Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website:
http://www.huawei.com Email:
support@huawei.com Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i RRU3256 Compliance and Safety Manual Contents Contents 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement ......................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 About This Chapter ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 European Community CE Certification DoC ................................................................................................ 1-1 2 Regulatory Compliance Information ..................................................................................... 2-1 2.1 About This Chapter ....................................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Regulatory Compliance Standards ................................................................................................................ 2-1 2.3 European Directives Compliance .................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.4 CISPR 22 Compliance .................................................................................................................................. 2-5 3 Safety Information ..................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 About This Chapter ....................................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2.1 Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................................ 3-1 3.2.2 General Requirements .......................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.3 Electricity Safety ........................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.3.1 High Voltage ........................................................................................................................................ 3-3 3.3.2 Thunderstorm ....................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.3.3 Tools ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.3.4 High Electrical Leakage ....................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.3.5 Power Cable ......................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.4 Electrostatic Discharge .................................................................................................................................. 3-5 3.5 Inflammable Environment ............................................................................................................................. 3-6 3.6 Radiation ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.6.1 Electromagnetic Field Exposure .......................................................................................................... 3-6 3.6.2 Laser..................................................................................................................................................... 3-9 3.7 Working at Heights ...................................................................................................................................... 3-10 3.7.1 Weight Lifting .................................................................................................................................... 3-11 3.7.2 Safety Guide on Ladder Use .............................................................................................................. 3-12 3.8 Mechanical Safety ....................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.8.1 Drilling ............................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.8.2 Sharp Objects ..................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.8.3 Handling Fans .................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.8.4 Lifting Heavy Objects ........................................................................................................................ 3-14 Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii RRU3256 Compliance and Safety Manual Contents 3.9 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................................................. 3-14 3.9.1 Inserting and Removing a Board ........................................................................................................ 3-14 3.9.2 Bundling Signal Cables ...................................................................................................................... 3-14 3.9.3 Cabling Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 3-14 Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii Compliance and Safety Manual 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement 1.1 About This Chapter This chapter provides the certification details for RRU3256:
European Community CE Certification Declaration of Conformity (DoC) 1.2 European Community CE Certification DoC CE Certification Doc is not attached because this Compliance is for the United States only, Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-1 Compliance and Safety Manual 2 Regulatory Compliance Information 2 Regulatory Compliance Information 2.1 About This Chapter The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Title Description 2.2 Regulatory Compliance Standards The regulatory compliance standards on EMC, safety, Laser Radiation, RF, health, and environmental protection. 2.3 European Directives Compliance The compliance with European directives, including RoHS compliance and device recycling guide. 2.3 European Directives Compliance The Japan regulatory compliance. 2.4 CISPR 22 Compliance The CISPR 22 regulatory compliance. 2.2 Regulatory Compliance Standards RRU3256 complies with the standards listed in Table 2-1. Table 2-1 Regulatory compliance standards Discipline Standards EMC CISPR22 Class B CISPR24 EN55022 Class B EN55024 ETSI EN 301 489 Class B CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class B ICES 003 Class B AS/NZS CISPR22 Class B Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-1 Compliance and Safety Manual 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Discipline Standards Safety GB9254 Class B VCCI Class B CNS 13438 Class B IEC 60950-1 IEC60950-21 IEC60950-22 IEC60065 IEC/EN60215 IEC/EN41003 EN 60950-1 UL 60950-1 CSA C22.2 No 60950-1 AS/NZS 60950.1 BS EN 60950-1 IS 13252 GB4943 GB8898 UL50 UL60950-22 Laser safety FDA rules, 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 IEC60825-1, IEC60825-2, EN60825-1, EN60825-2 RF GB7247 CFR 47 FCC Part27 CFR 47 FCC Part90 IC RSS-Gen IC RSS-192 IC RSS-197 ETSI EN 301 908-1 ETSI EN 301 908-14 ETSI EN 301 908-20 ETSI EN 302 544-1 TELEC-T139 Health ICNIRP Guideline 1999-519-EC EN 50385 OET Bulletin 65 IEEE Std C95.1 EN 60215 Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-2 Compliance and Safety Manual 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Discipline Standards Environmental protection RoHS Grounding ITU-T K.27 ETSI EN 300 253 Note:
EMC: electromagnetic compatibility RF: radio frequency CISPR: International Special Committee on Radio Interference EN: European Standard ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute CFR: Code of Federal Regulations FCC: Federal Communication Commission IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission AS/NZS: Australian/New Zealand Standard VCCI: Voluntary Control Council for Interference CNS: Chinese National Standard UL: Underwriters Laboratories CSA: Canadian Standards Association BS: British Standard IS: Indian Standard GR: general requirement FDA: Food and Drug Administration DBS: distribut transceiver station GSM: Global System for Mobile communications LTE: Long Term Evolution WiMAXWorldwide interoperability Microwave Access WLAN: wireless local area network ICNIRP: International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection OET: Office of Engineering Technology IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers RoHS: restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances 2.3 European Directives Compliance RRU3256 complies with the following European directives. 2004/108/EC (EMC) 2006/95/EC (low voltage) 1999/5/EC (R&TTE) Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-3 Compliance and Safety Manual 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Refer to for Huawei Declaration of Conformity. RRU3256 complies with Directive 2002/95/EC, on the RoHS in electrical and electronic equipment. The device does not contain lead, mercury, cadmium, and hexavalent chromium and brominated flame retardants (polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) or polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE)) except for those exempted applications allowed by RoHS directive for technical reasons. RRU3256 complies with Directive 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment. Huawei is responsible for recycling its end-of-life devices. Contact Huawei local service center when recycling is required. The main materials in the device are steel, plastics, copper, and electronic components. Most of the materials are recyclable. Table 2-2 lists the main materials used in the device. Table 2-2 Main materials used in the device Part Material Weight (kg) Percentage (Based on Product Weight) RoHS Substance Al Fe ABS Typical configuration 15.386 0.396 0.054 97.30%
2.50%
0.87%
15.836 100%
Shelf Total Table 2-3 Main materials used in the RRU3332 shelf No No No Part Material Weight (kg) Percentage (Based on Product Weight) RoHS Substance Fe AL PC ABS Rubber Foam Typical configuration 2.6843 0.0016 0.016 0.024 0.002 0.04 97.31%
0.04%
0.35%
0.84%
0.07%
1.40%
2.7663 100%
Shelf Total No No No No No No Comply with the following rules for recycling at the end of life of the device. Power off the RRU. Wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves Loosen the screw for protecting the cabling cavity on the cover plate by using the M4 screwdriver, and then open the cabling cavity of the RRU by lifting the handle on the cover plate. Record all the cable connections on the panel of the board to be replaced. Disconnect the cables from the ports in the cabling cavity and on the bottom panel. Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-4 Compliance and Safety Manual 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Loosen the captive screws on the two contact pieces of the main bracket by using the M4 screwdriver Use an M6 screwdriver to tighten the screw on the adapting piece of the RRU. Using the screw only for removing the RRU, loosen the connection between the adapting piece and the main bracket, and then lift the bottom of the RRU to remove the RRU Install a new RRU, and then waterproof the RRU Insert all the cables to be connected to the RRU, and then check that the idle cables trough in the cabling cavity are fitted with waterproof fillers. Close the cover plate of the cabling cavity of the RRU, and then tighten the screw for protecting the cabling cavity on the cover plate until the tightening torque reaches 1.4 Nm. Power on the RRU. 2.4 CISPR 22 Compliance RRU3256 complies with CISPR 22 for Class B by the ITE. Class A ITE is a category of all other ITE that satisfies only the Class A ITE regulations, and not the Class B ITE regulations. Such equipment should not be restricted in its sale but the following warning shall be included in the instructions for use:
Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-5 Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information 3 Safety Information 3.1 About This Chapter The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Title 3.2 Overview Description Safety precautions to be taken before installing and maintaining the Huawei device. 3.3 Electricity Safety Information about the electricity safety. 3.4 Electrostatic Discharge Information about the electrostatic discharge safety. 3.5 Inflammable Environment Information about the inflammable environment safety. 3.6 Radiation Safety precautions on the Electromagnetic Field Exposure of the device and laser. 3.7 Working at Heights Safety precautions to be taken before using the ladders or hoisting heavy objects. 3.8 Mechanical Safety Safety precautions on drilling, on sharp objects, on handling fans, and on lifting heavy objects. 3.9 Miscellaneous Safety precautions on inserting and removing boards, on bundling signal cables, and cabling requirements. 3.2 Overview 3.2.1 Safety Precautions This section describes the safety precautions to be taken before installing and maintaining the Huawei device. Before performing an operation, read the operation instructions and precautions to be taken, and follow them to prevent accidents. The Caution, Warning and Danger items in other documents do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. They are Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-1 Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information only supplementary information. The installation and maintenance personnel need to understand the basic safety precautions to be taken. When operating the device, obey the local safety regulations. The safety precautions provided in the documents are supplementary and shall be in compliance with the local safety regulations. When operating the Huawei device, in addition to the precautions, follow the specific safety instructions given by Huawei. The installation and maintenance personnel must receive training in safety precautions. Only qualified personnel can install or maintain the device. 3.2.2 General Requirements To minimize the technically residual risk, it is imperative to obey the following rules. Read all the instructions before operation. For DC model: Reinforce insulation or double insulation must be provided to isolate DC source from the AC mains supply. Installation Ground The device (or system) must be installed or used in the access restricted location. When installing the unit, always make the ground connection first and disconnect it at the end. The device must be fixed securely on the floor or other reliable objects, such as the walls and the mounting racks before opera. Do not damage the ground conductor or operate the device in the absence of well installed ground conductor. Conduct the appropriate electrical inspection. The device (or system) must be connected permanently to the protection ground before an operation. The cross sectional area of protective ground conductor shall be at least 16 mm. Power Supply For DC supplied model: The device applies to DC power source that complies with the Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) requirements in IEC 60950-1 based safety standards. Prepared conductors are connected to the terminal block, and only appropriate AWG/Type of wire is secured in the listed lug terminals. This device relies on the buildings installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection. Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 80 VDC, 25 A for DC supplied model is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors). For this device, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the building installation wiring. To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Human Safety Do not operate the device or cables at lightning strikes. To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telecommunication network voltage (TNV) circuits. Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-2 Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information Do not look directly into the optical port to prevent the laser radiation from injuring your eyes. Do not wear jewelry or watches when you operate the device. Operator Only qualified and skilled personnel must install, configure, and disassemble the device. Only the personnel authorized must operate the device. Any replacement or change to the device or parts of the device (including the software) must be done by qualified or authorized personnel of Huawei. Any fault or error that might cause safety problems must be reported immediately to the person in charge. Only qualified personnel must remove or disable the safety facilities, or to troubleshoot and maintain the device. Ensure that the instructions provided in this document are followed completely. The document also provides guidelines in selecting the measuring and testing device. 3.3 Electricity Safety 3.3.1 High Voltage The high voltage power supply offers power for the device operation. Direct or indirect contact (through damp objects) with high voltage and AC mains supply may result in fatal danger. During the installation of the AC power supply facility, follow the local safety regulations. The personnel who install the AC facility must be qualified to perform high voltage and AC operations. Do not wear conductive articles, such as watches, hand chains, bracelets and rings during the operation. When water is found in the rack or the rack is damp, switch off the power supply immediately. When the operation is performed in a damp environment, make sure that the device is dry. Non-standard and improper high voltage operations may result in fire and electric shock. Therefore, you must obey the local rules and regulations when bridging and wiring AC cables. Only qualified personnel must perform high voltage and AC operations. Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-3 DANGERWARNING Compliance and Safety Manual 3.3.2 Thunderstorm 3 Safety Information High voltage and AC operations, or operations on a steel tower and a mast are prohibited during thunderstorm. During thunderstorm, the electromagnetic field generated in the thunderstorm area may damage the electronic parts. To prevent damage to the device during lightning, ground the device properly. 3.3.3 Tools Suggestion: Dedicated tools must be used during high voltage and AC operations. Avoid using ordinary tools. 3.3.4 High Electrical Leakage Ground the device before powering on the device. Otherwise, the personnel and device are in danger. If the "high electrical leakage" flag is stuck to the power terminal of the device, you must ground the device before powering it on. 3.3.5 Power Cable Installation and removal of live line are prohibited. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or eye injury. Before installing or removing the power cable, turn off the power switch. Before connecting the power cable, confirm that the power cable and label comply with the requirements of the actual installation. Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-4 DANGERWARNINGWARNINGWARNING Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information For the DC power supplied device, use 1mm or 16AWG minimum power supply cord. Use the type H03VV-F or light PVC sheathed flexible cord based on IEC 60227. 3.4 Electrostatic Discharge The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive components on the circuit board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI). In the following situations, the human body will generate a static electromagnetic field:
Human body moving Clothes friction Friction between shoes and the ground Holding ordinary plastic in hand The static electromagnetic field will remain within the human body for a long time. Before touching the device, hand-operating parts, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear a grounded electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap. It can prevent the sensitive components from damage by the static electricity in the human body. Figure 3-1 shows the wearing of an ESD wrist strap. Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-5 CAUTIONCAUTION Compliance and Safety Manual Figure 3-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap 3 Safety Information 3.5 Inflammable Environment Operating the electrical device in inflammable environment can be fatal. Do not place the device in the environment that has inflammable and explosive air or fog. Do not perform any operation in this environment. 3.6 Radiation 3.6.1 Electromagnetic Field Exposure Radio-frequency signals with high intensity are harmful to human body. Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-6 DANGERWARNING Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information Before installing or maintaining an antenna in a steel tower or a mast with a large number of transmitter antennas, the operator should coordinate with the parties concerned to shut down the transmitter antennas. Introduction The BTS emits RF radiation (radiation hazard). Operators have to follow the related local regulations when erecting the BTS. Operators of BTSs must also follow the related local regulations when erecting the BTS. Limits and Guidelines on Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields There are a number of international regulations, standards and guidelines for exposure to electromagnetic fields. Several European countries have adopted the recommendation of the council of the European Union. It was released on July 12, 1999 focusing on the harmful effects of exposure to electromagnetic fields (1999/519/EC). The recommendation is based on the guideline published by the ICNIRP. Table 3-1 gives a comparison among regulations and reference levels applied in different countries. Table 3-1 Different regulations and reference Country Limit 950 MHz E Electric Field Strength Limit 950 MHz S Power Flux Density Limit 1850 MHz E Electric Field Strength Limit 1850 MHz S Power Flux Density 42 V/m 4.75 W/m2 59 V/m 9.25 W/m2 42 V/m 4.75 W/m2 59 V/m 9.25 W/m2 6 V/m 4 V/m 0.095 W/m2 6 V/m 0.095 W/m2 0.043 W/m2 6 V/m 0.096 W/m2 ICNIRP International Europe
(1999/519/EC) Italy, Decreto No. 381, 1998 Switzerland Verord. 1999 Reference levels are provided for exposure assessment, that is to determine whether the basic limit of restriction on exposure of humans to electromagnetic fields is exceeded. The basic restriction on exposure to electromagnetic fields is based on established health effects and biological considerations. Location of Base Station Antennas Base station antennas, the source of the radiation, are usually mounted:
On freestanding towers, with a height up to 30 m, or On a tower on the top of buildings, or On rare occasion, to the side of the building. Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-7 Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information Generally, the height of the antenna position does not fall below 10 m. The power usually forms a horizontal main beam and is slightly tilted downward. The remaining power forms into the weaker beams on both sides of the main beam. The main beam, however, does not reach ground level until the distance from the antenna position is around 50200 m. The highest level of emission would be expected in close vicinity of the antenna and in line of sight to the antenna. Exclusion Zones The requirements for exclusion zones are as follows:
Antenna location should be designed so that the public cannot access the area where the RF radiation exceeds the levels as described earlier. If areas, where the RF radiation exceeds the prescribed level, are accessible to the workers, make sure that workers know where these areas are, and that they can power off
(or shut down) the transmitters before entering these areas. Such areas may not exist; but if they do, they will be confined to areas within 10 m of the antennas. Each exclusion zone should be defined by a physical barrier and by a recognizable sign warning the public or workers. Guidelines on Arranging Antenna Sites The guidelines on arranging the antenna sites are as follows:
For roof-mounted antennas, raise the antennas above the height of the persons, who may have to work in the rooftop. For roof-mounted antennas, keep the transmitter antennas away from the areas where people are most likely to be, such as roof access points, telephone service points, and HVAC device. For roof-mounted directional antennas, place the antennas near the periphery, and do not make the antennas face to the building. Consider the trade-off between large aperture antennas (lower maximum RF) and small aperture antennas (lower visual impact). Pay special attention to keep higher-power antennas away from accessible areas. Keep the antennas in a site that is far away, though this may contradict the local zone requirements. Exercise extra caution when designing co-location sites, that is, where multiple antennas owned by different companies are located. This applies particularly to sites that include high-power broadcast (FM/TV) antennas. Local zone often favors co-location, but co-location may cause safety problems. Take special precautions for antenna sites near hospital and schools. Location of Base Transceiver Station The base transceiver station (BTS) is shielded from RF radiation hazards. The device has been tested to comply with the radioactive spurious emission requirements of EN 301 502. These limits fall below the limits for RF radiation hazard. Therefore, the BTS does not cause danger to the public and workers under normal operation condition. However, it is still possible that because of imperfect antenna cables or other faults the limits set out above can be exceeded. BTS sites shall not be accessible to the public. Only authorized and trained workers should access sites or rooms. Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-8 Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information Doors of the site or room shall be clearly marked. For example, mark a sign warning the workers that inside the site or room where the RF radiation might exceed limits for radiation exposure. BTS sites shall be regularly monitored and inspected after installation. Prediction of the Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields The section provides a theoretical approach to calculate possible exposure to electromagnetic radiation around a BTS antenna. Precise statements are possible either with measurements or complex calculations considering the complexity of the environment, such as soil conditions, nearby buildings and other obstacles. The complexity may cause reflections and deflection, scattering of electromagnetic fields. The maximum output power (given in EIRP) of a BTS is usually limited by license conditions of the network operator. RRU3256 supports the maximum output power of 20Wsingle channle A rough estimation of the expected exposure in power flux density on a given point can be made with the following equation:
P = Maximum output power in W G numeric = Numeric gain (see below) r = Distance between the antenna and the point of exposure in meters For the calculation of the Gain numeric:
B = attenuation in dB 3.6.2 Laser The laser hazard level of this device is Class 1. When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look at the optical fiber outlet directly with unaided eyes. General Laser Information Laser transceivers or transmitters are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The wavelength of the laser is between 780 nm and 1600 nm. Because the laser is Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-9
)(4)(2mrGWPSnumeric1010GdBnumericG)()()()(dBBdBBdBBdBGGdBnattenuatiohorizontalonattenutativerticalcableantennaWARNING Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information transmitted through the optical fiber, it has very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters the eye, the retina may be damaged. Laser of wavelengths used in telecommunications can cause thermal damage to the retina. Lasers used in lightwave systems have a larger beam divergence, typically 10 to 20 degrees. Viewing an un-terminated fiber or damaged fiber with the unaided eye at distances greater than 150 mm (6 inches) will normally not cause eye injury. However, damage may occur if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass or eye loupe is used to view the energized fiber end. In its normal operating mode, a lightwave system is totally enclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. Additional safety is achieved by an automatic laser shut-down (ALS) of the system. The ALS, however, can be applied for bi-directional transmission only. If the receiver side does not detect the laser from the transmission side, it will give the transmission side a signal. Upon receiving the signal, the ALS will shut down the laser emission within 100 ms. Laser Safety Guidelines Read the following guidelines to avoid laser radiation:
Read the instructions before installing, operating and maintaining the device. Ignoring the instructions can cause exposure to dangerous laser radiation. Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers. All the operation shall be performed by personnel who have completed the approved training courses. Make sure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors. Before opening the front door of an optical transmission system, make sure that you are not exposed to laser radiation. Do not look at the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched off or not. Use an optical power meter to check and ensure that the optical source is switched off by measuring the optical power. Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass or an eye loupe to view the optical connector or fiber. Handling Fibers Read the instructions before handling fibers. Cutting and splicing fibers must be performed by the trained personnel only. Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure the fiber is disconnected from the optical source. After disconnecting the fiber, use protecting caps to protect all the optical connectors. 3.7 Working at Heights Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-10 Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information When working at heights, be careful to prevent objects from falling. When working at heights, shall comply with the following requirements. The personnel who work at heights must be trained. The operating machines and tools shall be carried and handled safely to avoid falling. Safety protection measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, shall be taken. In cold regions, wear worm clothes when performing high-altitude operation. All lifting appliances must be thoroughly checked before the work is started. 3.7.1 Weight Lifting Do not access the areas under the jib arm and the goods in suspension when lifting weight. Ensure the operators have completed the related training and are qualified. Check the weight lifting tools and confirm that the tools are in good condition. Lift the weight only when the weight lifting tools are firmly fixed onto the weight-bearing object or the wall. Use a concise command to avoid incorrect operation. Ensure the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the lift.
(see Figure 3-2). Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-11 WARNINGWARNING Compliance and Safety Manual Figure 3-2 Weight lifting 3 Safety Information 3.7.2 Safety Guide on Ladder Use Checking the Ladder Before using the ladder, first check if the ladder is in good condition. Make sure that you know the maximum weight that the ladder can support; overweight on the ladder is strictly prohibited. Placing the Ladder Slant angle is suggested to be 75 degrees. The slant can be measured with the angle square or with arms. When using a ladder, place the wider end of the ladder on the ground. Otherwise, take protective measures on the base part of the ladder to avoid skidding. Place the ladder on stable ground. Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-12 Maximum 90 Compliance and Safety Manual Climbing the Ladder 3 Safety Information When climbing the ladder, note the following. Ensure the gravity center of your body does not deviate from the ladder edge. To lessen the danger and ensure the safety, hold your balance on the ladder before any operation. Do not climb higher than the forth highest step of the ladder. If you are about to climb to the top, the length of the ladder shall be one meter higher than the eave. 3.8 Mechanical Safety 3.8.1 Drilling Drilling on the rack without permission is strictly prohibited. Drilling that does not satisfy the requirements concerned may damage the wires and cables inside the rack. If the metal shavings from the drilling fall into the rack, it may result in short circuit of the circuit boards. Before drilling a hole on the rack, wear insulation gloves, and remove the cables inside the rack. During the drilling, ensure that your eyes are well protected. The hot shavings may injury to your eyes. Ensure that the metal shavings do not get into the rack. Non-standard drilling may damage the electromagnetic shielding performance of the rack. After drilling, clean the metal shavings in time. 3.8.2 Sharp Objects When carrying the device by hand, wear protection gloves to avoid injury by sharp objects. 3.8.3 Handling Fans Ensure the following:
When replacing a component, place the component, screw, and tool at a safe place to prevent them from falling into the running fan. Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-13 WARNINGWARNING Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information When replacing the ambient equipment around the fan, do not place the finger or board into the running fan until the fan is switched off and stops running. 3.8.4 Lifting Heavy Objects When lifting heavy objects, do not stand or walk under the arm or the lifted object. 3.9 Miscellaneous 3.9.1 Inserting and Removing a Board To insert or remove a board, abide by the following requirements:
When inserting a board, handle it gently to avoid distorting pins on the backplane. Insert the board along the slot guide. The two sides of one board should not contact another board to avoid short-circuit or scratch. When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuit, components, connectors, or connection slots. 3.9.2 Bundling Signal Cables Bundle the signal cables separately from the strong current cables or high voltage cables. Maintain a minimum space of 150 mm between adjacent ties. 3.9.3 Cabling Requirements At a very low temperature, movement of the cable may damage the plastic skin of the cable. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:
When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0C. If cables are stored in the place below 0C, move the cables into a place at a room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before installation. Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-14 WARNINGCAUTIONCAUTION Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information Move the cables with care, especially at a low temperature. Do not drop the cables directly from the vehicle. Issue 01 (2012-02-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-15
1 | Hardware Description-EN | Users Manual | 583.94 KiB | August 08 2014 |
DBS3900 V100R005C00 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description Issue Date Draft A 2012-11-30 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website:
Email:
http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description About This Document About This Document Purpose This document provides reference for planning and deploying an RRU3252/RRU3256 (referred to as RRU in this document). It presents the exterior and describes the ports, functions, cable types, connector specifications, and cable connections of the RRU. Product Version The following table lists the product version related to this document. Product Name DBS3900 LTE TDD Product Version V100R005C00 and later versions Intended Audience This document is intended for:
l Base station installation engineers l System engineers l Site maintenance engineers Organization 1 Change History This chapter describes changes in the RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description. 2 RRU Introduction This chapter describes the RRU. 3 RRU Cables This chapter describes RRU cables. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description About This Document 4 RRU Auxiliary Devices This chapter describes remote radio unit (RRU) auxiliary devices. Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description About This Document Convention Italic
[ ]
{ x | y | ... }
[ x | y | ... ]
{ x | y | ... }*
[ x | y | ... ]*
Description Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected. GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface
>
Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder. Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn. Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description About This Document Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description Contents Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Change History..............................................................................................................................1 2 RRU Introduction..........................................................................................................................2 2.1 RRU Exterior......................................................................................................................................................3 2.2 RRU Ports...........................................................................................................................................................4 2.3 RRU Indicators...................................................................................................................................................5 3 RRU Cables.....................................................................................................................................8 3.1 RRU Cable List................................................................................................................................................10 3.2 RRU PGND Cable............................................................................................................................................11 3.3 RRU Power Cable............................................................................................................................................12 3.4 RRU Alarm Cable............................................................................................................................................12 3.5 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable....................................................................................................................................14 3.6 RGPS Jumper...................................................................................................................................................17 3.7 SFP High-Speed Cable for Cascaded RRUs....................................................................................................18 3.8 RRU RF Jumper...............................................................................................................................................18 3.9 RRU AISG Multi-Wire Cable..........................................................................................................................19 3.10 RRU AISG Extension Cable..........................................................................................................................20 4 RRU Auxiliary Devices..............................................................................................................22 4.1 IFS06................................................................................................................................................................23 4.2 OCB..................................................................................................................................................................24 Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 1 Change History 1 Change History This chapter describes changes in the RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description. Draft A (2012-11-30) This is a draft. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 2 RRU Introduction 2 RRU Introduction About This Chapter This chapter describes the RRU. The RRU performs the following functions:
l Exchanges baseband data with a BBU. l Receives RF signals from the antenna system, converts the received signals into IF signals, amplifies the IF signals, and performs analog-to-digital conversion. The TX channel filters downlink signals, performs digital-to-analog conversion, and converts IF signals into signals applicable to the TX band. l Multiplexes RX and TX signals on the RF channel, which enables these signals to share the same antenna path. It also filters RX and TX signals. 2.1 RRU Exterior This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an RRU. 2.2 RRU Ports This section describes ports on the RRU panels. An RRU has a bottom panel, cabling cavity panel, and indicator panel. 2.3 RRU Indicators This section describes six indicators on an RRU. They indicate the running status. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 2 RRU Introduction 2.1 RRU Exterior This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an RRU. Figure 2-1 shows an RRU. Figure 2-1 RRU exterior Figure 2-2 shows RRU dimensions. Figure 2-2 RRU dimensions Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 2 RRU Introduction 2.2 RRU Ports This section describes ports on the RRU panels. An RRU has a bottom panel, cabling cavity panel, and indicator panel. Figure 2-3 shows the ports on the RRU panels. Figure 2-3 Ports on the RRU panels Table 2-1 describes ports and indicators on the RRU panels. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 2 RRU Introduction Table 2-1 Ports and indicators on the RRU panels Description TX/RX ports. ANT0 port supports RET signal transmission. Communication port for the RET antenna or port for alarm reporting, supporting RET signal transmission RGPS port, which is optional. Optical port Power supply socket For details, see 2.3 RRU Indicators. Item
(1) Ports at the bottom ANT0-ANT3 Label RET/EXT_ALM
(2) Ports in the cabling cavity
(3) Indicators RGPS CPRI0/IR0 CPRI1/IR1 RTN(+) NEG(-) RUN ALM ACT VSWR CPRI0/IR0 CPRI1/IR1 NOTE If only two RF ports are required, ANT0 and ANT1 are used by default. The RET ports to be used are determined by the software configuration. 2.3 RRU Indicators This section describes six indicators on an RRU. They indicate the running status. For the specific positions of RRU indicators, see 2.2 RRU Ports. Table 2-2 describes RRU indicators. Table 2-2 Indicators on the RRU Label RUN Color Green Status Steady on Steady off Description There is power supply, but the module is faulty. There is no power supply, or the module is faulty. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description Label Color 2 RRU Introduction Status Blinking on for 1s and off for 1s Description The module is working properly. Blinking on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s Software is being loaded to the module, or the module is not started. ALM Red Steady on Alarms are generated, and the module must be replaced. Steady off No alarm is generated. Blinking on for 1s and off for 1s ACT Green Steady on Alarms are generated. The alarms may be caused by the faults on the related modules or ports. Therefore, the necessity for module replacement is uncertain. The module is working properly with TX channels enabled or software is being loaded without RRU running. Blinking on for 1s and off for 1s The module is working properly with TX channels disabled. VSWR Red CPRI0/
IR0 Red or green Steady off Steady on Steady green Steady red Blinking red on for 1s and off for 1s CPRI1/
IR1 Red or green Steady off Steady green Steady red No VSWR alarm is generated. A VSWR alarm is generated. The CPRI link is functioning properly. An optical module fails to transmit or receive signals possibly because the optical module is faulty or the optical fiber cable is broken. The CPRI link is out of lock possibly because of mutual lock of dual-mode clock sources or mismatched data rates over CPRI ports. (You are advised to check the system configuration to rectify the fault.) The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off. The CPRI link is functioning properly. An optical module fails to transmit or receive signals possibly because the optical module is faulty or the optical fiber cable is broken. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description Label Color Status Blinking red on for 1s and off for 1s Steady off 2 RRU Introduction Description The CPRI link is out of lock possibly because of mutual lock of dual-mode clock sources or mismatched data rates over CPRI ports. (You are advised to check the system configuration to rectify the fault.) The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 3 RRU Cables 3 RRU Cables About This Chapter This chapter describes RRU cables. 3.1 RRU Cable List This section describes RRU cable connections. 3.2 RRU PGND Cable An RRU PGND cable connects an RRU and a ground bar, ensuring the proper grounding of the RRU. 3.3 RRU Power Cable An RRU power cable is a -48 V DC shielded cable. It feeds -48 V DC power into an RRU. 3.4 RRU Alarm Cable An RRU alarm cable, a shielded straight-through cable, transmits alarm signals from an external device to RRUs so that the base station can monitor the operating status of external devices. 3.5 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable CPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multi-mode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiber optic cables. They transmit CPRI signals. 3.6 RGPS Jumper A PGPS jumper connects a RGPS antenna to an RRU. 3.7 SFP High-Speed Cable for Cascaded RRUs This section describes the SFP high-speed cable for cascaded RRUs. An SFP high-speed cable for cascaded RRUs connects common public radio interface (CPRI) ports between two RRUs and transmits CPRI signals between RRUs. SFP is short for small form-factor pluggable while RRU is short for remote radio unit. 3.8 RRU RF Jumper A 1/2" RRU RF jumper transmits and receives RF signals. 3.9 RRU AISG Multi-Wire Cable This section describes a remote radio unit (RRU) AISG multi-wire cable with the length of 5 m. It connects an RRU and a remote control unit (RCU) to transmit control signals from an eNodeB to the remote electrical tilt (RET) antenna. When the RRU is connected to the RET antenna, an AISG multi-wire cable transmits RS485 signals. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 3 RRU Cables 3.10 RRU AISG Extension Cable This section describes the remote radio unit (RRU) AISG extension cable. When the distance between an RRU and a remote control unit (RCU) is longer than 5 m, an AISG multi-wire cable is not long enough to connect the RRU and the RCU. In this case, an AISG extension cable is used to extend the AISG multi-wire cable for transmitting RS485 signals. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 3.1 RRU Cable List This section describes RRU cable connections. Table 3-1 lists RRU cables. 3 RRU Cables Table 3-1 RRU cables Cable One End Connector 3.2 RRU PGND Cable OT terminal
(M6) 3.3 RRU Power Cable Tool-less female connector
(pressfit type) Connected to... Ground terminal on the RRU NEG(-) and RTN(+) ports on the RRU The Other End Connector Connected to... OT terminal
(M8) Ground terminal on the ground bar Tool-less female connector
(pressfit type) One of RRU0 to RRU5 ports on the EPS OT terminal
(M4) One of LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU One of LOAD4 to LOAD9 ports on the PDU CPRI port on the LBBP in the BBU CPRI0/IR0 port on the RRU Antenna system 3.5 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable DLC connector CPRI0/IR0 port on the RRU DLC connector 3.8 RRU RF Jumper Type N connector 3.6 RGPS Jumper
(optional) Waterproofed DB15 connector CPRI1/IR1 port on the RRU ANT0 to ANT3 ports on the RRU Remote Global Positioning System (RGPS) port at the RRU bottom Type N connector Round 12-pin connector RGPS antenna SFP20 male connector CPRI1 port on the RRU SFP20 male connector CPRI0 port on the RRU 3.7 SFP High-
Speed Cable for Cascaded RRUs
(optional) Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description Cable One End Connector 3.4 RRU Alarm Cable
(optional) Waterproofed DB9 male connector 3.9 RRU AISG Multi-Wire Cable
(optional) Waterproofed DB9 male connector Connected to... RET/
EXT_ALM port on the RRU RET/
EXT_ALM port on the RRU 3 RRU Cables The Other End Connector Connected to... Cord end terminal External alarm device Standard AISG female connector Standard AISG male connector on the remote control unit
(RCU) or on the AISG extension cable Standard AISG male connector on the RCU 3.10 RRU AISG Extension Cable
(optional) Standard AISG male connector Standard AISG female connector on the AISG multi-
wire cable Standard AISG female connector 3.2 RRU PGND Cable An RRU PGND cable connects an RRU and a ground bar, ensuring the proper grounding of the RRU. Exterior An RRU PGND cable is green or green and yellow, both ends of the cable are OT terminals. If the customer prepares the PGND cable, a copper-core cable with a minimum cross-sectional area of 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2) is recommended. Figure 3-1 shows a PGND cable. Figure 3-1 PGND cable
(1) OT terminal (M6)
(2) OT terminal (M8) OT terminals must be added to both ends of a PGND cable onsite. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 3.3 RRU Power Cable 3 RRU Cables An RRU power cable is a -48 V DC shielded cable. It feeds -48 V DC power into an RRU. Exterior An RRU power cable has an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector at one end and bare wires at the other end. Proper terminals are added to the bare wires based on the connector on the external power device, as shown in Figure 3-2. The cross-sectional area of an RRU power cable can be either 3.3 mm2 (0.005 in.2)/5.3 mm2
(0.008 in.2) or 4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)/6 mm2 (0.009 in.2). The former complies with North American standards and the latter complies with European standards. Figure 3-2 RRU power cable Pin Assignment The DC power input cable is a two-wire cable. Table 3-2 and Table 3-3 describe the pin assignment for the wires of a DC power input cable. Table 3-2 Pin assignment for the wires of a DC power input cable (North American standards) Wire NEG(-) Color Blue RTN(+) Black Table 3-3 Pin assignment for the wires of a DC power input cable (European standards) Wire NEG(-) Color Blue RTN(+) Brown 3.4 RRU Alarm Cable An RRU alarm cable, a shielded straight-through cable, transmits alarm signals from an external device to RRUs so that the base station can monitor the operating status of external devices. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description Exterior 3 RRU Cables An alarm cable has a DB9 connector at one end and eight cord end terminals at the other end, as shown in Figure 3-3. Figure 3-3 RRU alarm cable
(1) DB9 waterproof connector
(2) Cord end terminal Pin Assignment Table 3-4 describes the pin assignment for the wires of an RRU alarm cable. Table 3-4 Pin assignment for the wires of an RRU alarm cable RRU Alarm Port Dry contact Pin of the DB9 Connecto r X1.2 X1.4 X1.7 X1.4 RS485 X1.6 X1.8 X1.5 X1.3 Wire Color Wire Type Cord End Terminal Description White or blue Blue White or orange Orange White or green Green White or brown Brown Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 Boolean signal input 0+
Boolean signal input 0-
(GND) Boolean signal input 1+
Boolean signal input 1-
(GND) APM RX-
APM RX+
APM TX-
APM TX+
Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 3 RRU Cables 3.5 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable CPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multi-mode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiber optic cables. They transmit CPRI signals. NOTE l An ODF can be used when the distance between a BBU and an RRU or the distance between interconnected RRUs is longer than 100 m (328.08 ft). l A single-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU to an ODF or connects an ODF to an RRU. The maximum length of a CPRI fiber optic cable is 150 m (492.12 ft) When the fiber optical cable connects a BBU and an RRU. The length of a CPRI fiber optic cable is 10 m (32.81 ft) when the fiber optical cable connects two RRUs. Exterior Figure 3-4 shows a fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU or between RRUs, with a DLC connector at each end. Figure 3-4 Fiber optical cable between a BBU and an RRU or between RRUs
(1) DLC connector
(2) Branch optical fiber
(3) Label on the branch optical fiber When a fiber optical cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the optical fibers on the BBU side and RRU side are 0.34 m (0.013 in.) and 0.03 m (0.0012 in.) long, respectively. When a fiber optical cable connects two RRUs, the optical fibers on both RRU sides are 0.03 m (0.0012 in.) long. Figure 3-5 shows the connections for a CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 3 RRU Cables Figure 3-5 Connections for a CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU
(1) CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU Figure 3-6 shows a single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU, with a DLC connector at one end and an FC connector at the other end. Figure 3-6 Single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU
(1) DLC connector
(3) Label on the branch optical fiber
(2) Branch optical fiber
(4) FC connector When a single-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an ODF, the optical fibers on the BBU side and ODF side are 0.34 m (0.013 in.) and 0.8 m (0.031 in.) long, respectively. When a single-mode fiber optic cable connects an ODF and an RRU, the optical fibers on the RRU side and ODF side are 0.03 m (0.013 in.) and 0.8 m (0.031 in.) long, respectively. Figure 3-7 shows the connections for a single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 3 RRU Cables Figure 3-7 Connections for a single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU
(1) Single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF
(2) Single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between an ODF and an RRU NOTE A CPRI fiber optic cable must be connected to optical modules in the CPRI ports. A multi-mode fiber optic cable and single-mode fiber optic cable are connected to multi-mode optical modules and single-mode optical modules, respectively. Pin Assignment Table 3-5, Table 3-6, and Table 3-7 describe the labels on and recommended connections for fiber optic cables of an optical assembly. Table 3-5 Labels on and recommended connections for optical fibers of an optical assembly between a BBU and an RRU Label 1A 1B 2A 2B Connected To CPRI RX port on the RRU CPRI TX port on the RRU TX port on the BBU RX port on the BBU Table 3-6 Labels on and recommended connections for optical fibers of a fiber optic cable between RRUs Label 1A 1B Connected To CPRI RX port on RRU 1 CPRI TX port on RRU 1 Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 3 RRU Cables Label 2A 2B Connected To CPRI TX port on RRU 0 CPRI RX port on RRU 0 Table 3-7 Labels on and recommended connections for optical fibers of a single-mode optical assembly between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU Label 1A Connected To RX port on the BBU or CPRI RX port on the RRU 1B 2A 2B TX port on the BBU or CPRI TX port on the RRU ODF ODF 3.6 RGPS Jumper A PGPS jumper connects a RGPS antenna to an RRU. Exterior A RGPS jumper has a DB15 waterproof connector at one end and a round 12pin connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 3-8. Figure 3-8 RGPS jumper
(1) DB15 waterproof connector
(2) Round 12-pin connector Pin Assignment Table 3-8 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the RGPS jumper. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 3 RRU Cables Table 3-8 Pin assignment for the wires of the RGPS jumper X1 (Pin for the DB15 Waterproof Connector) X2 (Pin for the Round 12-pin Connector) Color Type Description X1.1 X1.6 X1.14 X1.13 X1.12 X1.11 X1.2 X1.7 X2.9 X2.1 X2.5 X2.4 X2.3 X2.2 X2.11 X2.12 White and blue Blue White and orange Orange Twisted pair Twisted pair White and green Twisted pair Green White and brown Twisted pair Brown GND
+28 V RXD_422+
RXD_422-
TXD_422+
TXD_422-
1PPS_422+
1PPS_422-
3.7 SFP High-Speed Cable for Cascaded RRUs This section describes the SFP high-speed cable for cascaded RRUs. An SFP high-speed cable for cascaded RRUs connects common public radio interface (CPRI) ports between two RRUs and transmits CPRI signals between RRUs. SFP is short for small form-factor pluggable while RRU is short for remote radio unit. Exterior Figure 3-9 shows an SFP high-speed cable for cascaded RRUs. Figure 3-9 SFP high-speed cable for cascaded RRUs 3.8 RRU RF Jumper A 1/2" RRU RF jumper transmits and receives RF signals. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description Exterior 3 RRU Cables An RF jumper has a Type N male connector at both ends, as shown in Figure 3-10. Figure 3-10 RF jumper
(1) Type N male connector 3.9 RRU AISG Multi-Wire Cable This section describes a remote radio unit (RRU) AISG multi-wire cable with the length of 5 m. It connects an RRU and a remote control unit (RCU) to transmit control signals from an eNodeB to the remote electrical tilt (RET) antenna. When the RRU is connected to the RET antenna, an AISG multi-wire cable transmits RS485 signals. NOTE An RCU is a driving motor used for the phase shifter in the RET antenna. It receives control commands from an eNodeB and runs the commands to drive the stepper motor. Using a gear, the stepper motor drives the adjustable phase shifter in the antenna and changes the downtilt angle. Exterior An AISG multi-wire cable has a waterproofed DB9 male connector at one end and a standard AISG female connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 3-11. Figure 3-11 AISG multi-wire cable 1. DB9 waterproof male connector 2. Standard AISG female connector Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description Pin Assignment 3 RRU Cables Table 3-9 describes the pin assignment for the core wires of an AISG multi-wire cable. Table 3-9 Pin assignment for the core wires of an AISG multi-wire cable Type of X1 End (Pin of the Waterproofed the Core Wire DB9 Male Connector) X2 End (Pin of the Standard AISG Female Connector) Color of the Core Wire Description X1.1 X1.3 X1.5 X1.4 X2.1 X2.3 X2.5 X2.4 X1.9 is connected to X1.4.
-
-
-
X2.1 is connected to X2.6. X2.4 is connected to X2.7. 3.10 RRU AISG Extension Cable White and blue Blue White and orange Orange White and green
-
-
-
Twisted pair Twisted pair
-
-
-
-
+12 V RS485 B RS485 A GND GND
+12 V GND This section describes the remote radio unit (RRU) AISG extension cable. When the distance between an RRU and a remote control unit (RCU) is longer than 5 m, an AISG multi-wire cable is not long enough to connect the RRU and the RCU. In this case, an AISG extension cable is used to extend the AISG multi-wire cable for transmitting RS485 signals. Exterior An AISG extension cable has a standard AISG male connector at one end and a standard AISG female connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 3-12. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description Figure 3-12 AISG extension cable 3 RRU Cables 1. Standard AISG male connector 2. Standard AISG female connector Pin Assignment Table 3-10 describes the pin assignment for the core wires of an AISG extension cable. Table 3-10 Pin assignment for the core wires of an AISG extension cable X1 End (Pin of the Standard AISG Male Connector) Color of the Core Wire Type of the Core Wire X2 End (Pin of the Standard AISG Female Connector) X2.1 Description X2.7 X2.3 X2.5 X2.6 White and blue Twisted pair
+12 V Blue White and orange Twisted pair DC Return A Orange White and green Twisted pair Green RS485 B RS485 A White and brown Twisted pair
+24 V Brown X1.1 X1.7 X1.3 X1.5 X1.6 Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 4 RRU Auxiliary Devices 4 RRU Auxiliary Devices About This Chapter This chapter describes remote radio unit (RRU) auxiliary devices. 4.1 IFS06 An Indoor Floor installation Support (IFS06) is used for installing indoor RRUs. 4.2 OCB An Outdoor Cable Conversion Box (OCB) interconnects cables of different core diameters. Power cables shipped with RRUs cannot support long-distance power supply. Therefore, when power supply is far from the equipment, cables with large core diameters are used, and an OCB connects these cables and RRU power cables. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description 4 RRU Auxiliary Devices 4.1 IFS06 Exterior An Indoor Floor installation Support (IFS06) is used for installing indoor RRUs. Figure 4-1 shows an IFS06. Figure 4-1 IFS06 Function l It can be installed on the ground. l The upper and lower adjustable beams on an IFS06 can be moved up and down to fit for heights of RRUs. Structure The IFS06 consists of the main frame, cable tray, upper and lower adjustable beams, and front and rear feet, as shown in Figure 4-2. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description Figure 4-2 IFS06 structure 4 RRU Auxiliary Devices
(1) Upper adjustable beam
(2) Main frame
(3) Lower adjustable beam
(4) Front foot
(5) Rear foot
(6) Cable tray Specifications Table 4-1 describes IFS06 specifications. Table 4-1 IFS06 specifications Item Dimensions Weight 4.2 OCB Specification 1730 mm (79 in.) x 600 mm (23.62 in.) x 600 mm (23.62 in.)
(H x W x D) 45 kg (99.23 lb) An Outdoor Cable Conversion Box (OCB) interconnects cables of different core diameters. Power cables shipped with RRUs cannot support long-distance power supply. Therefore, when power supply is far from the equipment, cables with large core diameters are used, and an OCB connects these cables and RRU power cables. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description Application Scenario of an OCB Figure 4-3 shows the application scenario of an OCB. Figure 4-3 Application scenario of an OCB 4 RRU Auxiliary Devices For details about the structure, functions, installation, and maintenance of an OCB, see the OCB User Guide. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25
1 | Hardware Maintenance Guide-EN | Users Manual | 406.97 KiB | August 08 2014 |
DBS3900 V100R005C00 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide Issue Date Draft A 2012-11-30 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website:
Email:
http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide About This Document About This Document Purpose This document describes routine maintenance procedures for an RRU3252/RRU3256 (referred to as RRU in this document), such as equipment preventive maintenance and power-on and power-off operations. It also describes how to replace the RRU and optical modules. Product Version The following table lists the product version related to this document. Product Name DBS3900 LTE TDD Product Version V100R005C00 and later versions Intended Audience This document is intended for:
l System engineers l Site maintenance engineers Organization 1 Change History This chapter describes changes in the RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide. 2 Preventive Maintenance Items for an RRU Preventive maintenance for an RRU improves RRU reliability. You are advised to perform scheduled maintenance yearly. 3 Powering On and Powering Off an RRU Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide About This Document After an RRU is powered on, the RRU indicator status and voltage must be checked. Before an RRU is powered off, you must decide whether to power off the RRU in a normal situation or an emergency based on onsite requirements. 4 Replacing an RRU A distributed base station consists of RRUs and a BBU. Replacing an RRU interrupts all the services carried by the RRU, and alarms are generated. 5 Replacing an Optical Module An optical module provides optical-electrical conversion ports, enabling optical transmission between an RRU and other devices. Optical cables inserted into an optical module must be removed before the optical module is replaced. Replacing an optical module interrupts CPRI signal transmission. Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Boldface Italic Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide About This Document Description Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New. Convention Courier New Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected. Convention Boldface Italic
[ ]
{ x | y | ... }
[ x | y | ... ]
{ x | y | ... }*
[ x | y | ... ]*
GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder. Convention Boldface
>
Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Key Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide About This Document Format Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn. Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide Contents Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Change History..............................................................................................................................1 2 Preventive Maintenance Items for an RRU..............................................................................2 3 Powering On and Powering Off an RRU..................................................................................4 3.1 Powering On an RRU.........................................................................................................................................5 3.2 Powering Off an RRU........................................................................................................................................6 4 Replacing an RRU.........................................................................................................................7 5 Replacing an Optical Module...................................................................................................10 Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide 1 Change History 1 Change History This chapter describes changes in the RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide. Draft A (2012-11-30) This is a draft. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide 2 Preventive Maintenance Items for an RRU 2 Preventive Maintenance Items for an RRU Preventive maintenance for an RRU improves RRU reliability. You are advised to perform scheduled maintenance yearly. DANGER While working at a high place, be careful not to drop any objects. Falling objects may cause serious injury or death. All maintenance personnel must wear a helmet and avoid standing in areas with a danger. The items listed in the following table are not mandatory but strongly recommended. Table 2-1 lists the preventive maintenance items for an RRU. Table 2-1 Preventive maintenance items for an RRU SN Checklist 1 All RRUs are properly installed and in good conditions. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Cables at the cable inlet of a cabinet are sealed properly. All RF cables are intact and free from any cracks, cuts, or other damage. All RF cable connectors are sealed properly. All RF cable conduits are in good conditions. All power cables are intact and free from any cracks, cuts, or other damage. All power cable connectors are in good conditions. All power cable conduits are in good conditions. All shield layers of power cables are in good conditions. All power cables are sealed properly. All CPRI fiber optic cables are intact and free from any cracks, cuts, or other damage. All screws are tightened on the cover plate of the maintenance cavity. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide 2 Preventive Maintenance Items for an RRU SN Checklist 13 All optional RET cables are intact and free from any cracks, cuts, or other damage. Connectors of all optional RET cables are sealed properly. All optional alarm cables are securely installed and free from any damage. 14 15 If any of the statements in the checklist cannot be complied with, perform the following corrective actions:
1. 2. Report any other faults found when filling in the checklist to the supervisor, because only Tighten all connections. qualified or trained field engineers are permitted to climb towers for further repairs. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide 3 Powering On and Powering Off an RRU 3 Powering On and Powering Off an RRU About This Chapter After an RRU is powered on, the RRU indicator status and voltage must be checked. Before an RRU is powered off, you must decide whether to power off the RRU in a normal situation or an emergency based on onsite requirements. 3.1 Powering On an RRU Set the corresponding circuit breaker on the auxiliary power device for the RRU to ON, and check the operating status of the RRU by observing the status of RRU indicators. 3.2 Powering Off an RRU You can power off an RRU either in a normal situation or an emergency. A normal situation refers to the cases such as equipment reparenting or anticipated interruption of regional mains supply. An emergency refers to the cases such as a fire, smoke, and water damage at the site. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide 3 Powering On and Powering Off an RRU 3.1 Powering On an RRU Set the corresponding circuit breaker on the auxiliary power device for the RRU to ON, and check the operating status of the RRU by observing the status of RRU indicators. Prerequisites Context Procedure l The RRU hardware is installed and RRU cable connections are secure. l The input voltage of the RRU ranges from -32 V DC to -60 V DC. CAUTION After you unpack an RRU, you must power on it within 24 hours. If you power off the RRU for maintenance, you must restore power to the RRU within 24 hours. Step 1 Set the corresponding circuit breaker on the auxiliary power device for the RRU to ON to power on the RRU. DANGER Do not look into the optical module without eye protection after the RRU is powered on. Step 2 Keep the RRU running for three to five minutes to check the status of RRU indicators. For details, see RRU Indicators. NOTE If RRUs are cascaded, check the status of all RRU indicators. Step 3 Take corresponding actions based on the status of the indicators. If... The RRU is working properly The RRU is faulty Then... End the power-on check task. Set the circuit breaker to OFF. Rectify the fault, and then go to Step 1.
----End Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide 3 Powering On and Powering Off an RRU 3.2 Powering Off an RRU You can power off an RRU either in a normal situation or an emergency. A normal situation refers to the cases such as equipment reparenting or anticipated interruption of regional mains supply. An emergency refers to the cases such as a fire, smoke, and water damage at the site. Procedure l Power-off in a normal situation Set the corresponding circuit breaker on the auxiliary power device for the RRU to OFF. l Power-off in an emergency CAUTION Power-off in an emergency may damage the RRU, and do not use it in normal situations. 1. 2. Power off the auxiliary power device for the RRU. If time permits, set the corresponding circuit breaker on the auxiliary power device for the RRU to OFF.
----End Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide 4 Replacing an RRU 4 Replacing an RRU Prerequisites A distributed base station consists of RRUs and a BBU. Replacing an RRU interrupts all the services carried by the RRU, and alarms are generated. l The test UE communicates with the base station properly. l The types of faulty RRUs are confirmed as follows:
If RRUs can be queried online, run the DSP BRDMFRINFO command on the LMT to query the electronic labels of the RRUs. If RRUs cannot be queried online, the information about the RRUs can be queried offline on the M2000. For details, see the procedure for querying inventory data in the M2000 documentation. l Tools and materials, such as ESD gloves, M4 Phillips screwdrivers, M6 Phillips screwdrivers, waterproof tape, and PVC insulation tape, are ready. l The number of RRUs to be replaced are confirmed, and new RRUs are ready. Procedure Step 1 Run the BLK BRD command to block the RRU. Step 2 Power off the RRU by referring to 3.2 Powering Off an RRU. Step 3 Wear ESD gloves. CAUTION l Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, wear ESD gloves, to prevent electrostatic damage to modules or electronic components. l Pay attention to the high temperature while replacing an RRU without housing. Step 4 Use an M4 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the protection screw on the cover plate of the RRU cabling cavity, and pull the handle outwards to open the cover plate. Step 5 Record the cable connections in the cabling cavity. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide 4 Replacing an RRU Step 6 Disconnect cables from the cabling cavity and the bottom of the RRU. Step 7 Use an M4 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screws on the two hoist clamps on the main mounting bracket, as shown in Figure 4-1. NOTE In scenarios where RRUs are installed in centralized mode, the RRU in the middle can be removed without removing the two RRUs on its right and left sides, in the same procedure as that for removing a single RRU. Figure 4-1 Loosening the screws on the main mounting bracket Step 8 Hold the RRU and move it upwards to remove it, as shown in Figure 4-2. Figure 4-2 Removing an RRU Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide 4 Replacing an RRU CAUTION When removing the RRU, hold the RRU handle with one hand, support the RRU bottom with the other hand, and move the RRU upwards. Step 9 Tighten the captive screws on the two hoist clamps on the main mounting bracket with a torque of 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.). Step 10 Install a new RRU. Step 11 Install all required cables to the RRU and ensure that a waterproof block is inserted into each vacant cable trough in the cabling cavity. Step 12 Close the cover plate of the RRU cabling cavity, and then tighten the protection screw on the cover plate with a torque of 0.8 Nm (7.08 lbfin.). Step 13 Power on the RRU by referring to 3.1 Powering On an RRU. Step 14 Check the operating status of the new RRU by observing the status of RRU indicators. For details about the status of the indicators, see RRU Indicators. Step 15 Run the UBL BRD command to unblock the RRU. Step 16 Take off the ESD gloves, and pack up all the tools.
----End Follow-up Procedure l Place the removed RRU into the ESD box or bag. Then, place the ESD box or bag into a foam-padded carton or the packing box of the new RRU. l Fill in the fault form with detailed information about the removed component. l Contact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty component. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide 5 Replacing an Optical Module 5 Replacing an Optical Module An optical module provides optical-electrical conversion ports, enabling optical transmission between an RRU and other devices. Optical cables inserted into an optical module must be removed before the optical module is replaced. Replacing an optical module interrupts CPRI signal transmission. Prerequisites Context l New optical modules are sufficient and the type of them is the same as that of the faulty ones based on the labels on optical modules. l The following tools and materials are available: M4 Phillips screwdriver, ESD gloves, and ESD box or bag. l Optical modules are hot-swappable when the same CPRI port is used. l It takes about 5 minutes to replace an optical module on the RRU, which involves removing fiber optic cables and a faulty optical module, installing a new optical module and the fiber optic cable, and waiting for CPRI links to recover. Procedure Step 1 Wear ESD gloves. CAUTION Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, wear ESD gloves, to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components. Step 2 Use an M4 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the protection screw on the cover plate of the RRU cabling cavity and then pull the handle outwards to open the cover plate. Step 3 Record the connections of the optical module and fiber optic cables. Step 4 Press the latch on the connector of the fiber optic cable, and then remove the connector from the faulty optical module. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Maintenance Guide 5 Replacing an Optical Module WARNING Do not look into the fiber optic cable and optical module without eye protection after the fiber optic cable is removed from the optical module. Step 5 Lower the puller on the faulty optical module, and then pull the puller until the optical module is removed from the RRU. Step 6 Install the new optical module on the RRU. NOTE An optical module to be replaced or installed must match the data transmission rate over a CPRI port. Step 7 Connect the fiber optic cable to the new optical module. Step 8 Observe the indicators near the CPRI0/IR0 and CPRI1/IR1 ports and check whether CPRI signal transmission is normal. For details about the indicator meanings, see RRU Indicators. Step 9 Reinstall the cables in the cabling cavity. Step 10 Close the cover plate of the RRU cabling cavity and then tighten the protection screw on the cover plate with a torque of 0.8 Nm (7.08 lbfin.). Step 11 Take off the ESD gloves and pack up all tools.
----End Follow-up Procedure l Place the removed optical module into an ESD box or bag. Then, place the ESD box or bag into a foam-padded carton or into the packing box of the new optical module. l Fill in the fault form with detailed information about the removed component. l Contact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty optical module. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11
1 | Installation Guide-EN | Users Manual | 2.54 MiB | August 08 2014 |
DBS3900 V100R005C00 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide Issue Date Draft A 2012-11-30 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website:
Email:
http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide About This Document About This Document Purpose This document describes the process of installing a DC RRU3252/RRU3256 (referred to as RRU in this document). Product Version The following table lists the product version related to this document. Product Name DBS3900 LTE TDD Product Version V100R005C00 and later versions Intended Audience This document is intended for:
Base station installation engineers Organization 1 Change History This chapter describes changes in the RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide. 2 Installation Preparations This chapter describes the reference documents, tools, and instruments that must be ready before the installation. In addition, it specifies the skills that installation engineers must have. 3 Information About the Installation Before installing an RRU, you must be familiar with its exterior, ports, installation options, physical supports, and installation clearance requirements. 4 Unpacking the Equipment This chapter describes how to unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 5 Installation Process About This Document The installation process involves installing an RRU and RRU cables, checking the RRU hardware installation, and powering on the RRU. 6 Hoisting the RRU and Cables onto a Tower This section describes how to hoist the RRU and Cables onto a tower and provides important notes about the installation. 7 Installing the RRU This chapter describes the procedure for installing the RRU. The RRU can be installed on a pole, U-steel, angle steel, or wall as required. 8 Installing RRU Cables This chapter describes the procedure for installing RRU cables. 9 Checking the RRU Hardware Installation This section describes how to check RRU hardware installation after the installation is complete. 10 Powering On an RRU This section describes how to check the power-on status of an RRU after all the devices are installed. 11 Appendix This section describes the procedure for adding an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector. Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide General Conventions About This Document The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected. Convention Boldface Italic
[ ]
{ x | y | ... }
[ x | y | ... ]
{ x | y | ... }*
[ x | y | ... ]*
GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface
>
Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide About This Document Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn. Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide Contents Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Change History..............................................................................................................................1 2 Installation Preparations..............................................................................................................2 2.1 Reference Documents.........................................................................................................................................3 2.2 Tools and Instruments........................................................................................................................................3 2.3 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel...................................................................................................4 3 Information About the Installation...........................................................................................5 3.1 RRU Exterior......................................................................................................................................................6 3.2 RRU Ports...........................................................................................................................................................7 3.3 RRU Indicators...................................................................................................................................................8 3.4 Installation Options...........................................................................................................................................10 3.5 Installation Clearance Requirements of an RRU..............................................................................................15 3.5.1 Clearance for a Single RRU....................................................................................................................15 3.5.2 Clearance for Multiple RRUs..................................................................................................................17 3.5.3 Spacing Between RRUs...........................................................................................................................20 4 Unpacking the Equipment.........................................................................................................23 5 Installation Process.....................................................................................................................25 6 Hoisting the RRU and Cables onto a Tower..........................................................................26 6.1 Hoisting an RRU onto a Tower........................................................................................................................27 6.2 Hoisting Fiber Optic Cables onto a Tower.......................................................................................................31 6.3 Hoisting Power Cables onto a Tower...............................................................................................................33 7 Installing the RRU.......................................................................................................................37 7.1 Mounting Kits for an RRU...............................................................................................................................38 7.2 Installing the RRU on a Pole............................................................................................................................38 7.2.1 Installing a Single RRU...........................................................................................................................43 7.2.2 Installing Two RRUs...............................................................................................................................46 7.2.3 Installing Multiple RRUs.........................................................................................................................48 7.3 Installing the RRU on U-Steel..........................................................................................................................53 7.4 Installing the RRU on Angle Steel...................................................................................................................57 7.5 Installing the RRU on a Wall...........................................................................................................................60 Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide Contents 8 Installing RRU Cables................................................................................................................65 8.1 Cabling Requirements......................................................................................................................................67 8.2 Cable Connections............................................................................................................................................72 8.3 Installation Process...........................................................................................................................................75 8.4 RRU Cable List................................................................................................................................................76 8.5 Installing an RRU PGND Cable.......................................................................................................................78 8.6 Installing an RRU RF Jumper..........................................................................................................................79 8.7 Installing an RRU Alarm Cable........................................................................................................................82 8.8 Installing an RRU AISG Multi-Wire Cable and an RRU AISG Extension Cable...........................................83 8.9 Opening the Cover Plate of an RRU Cabling Cavity.......................................................................................86 8.10 Installing an RRU Power Cable......................................................................................................................88 8.11 Installing an Optical Fiber Cable ...................................................................................................................89 8.12 Closing the Cover Plate of an RRU Cabling Cavity......................................................................................91 9 Checking the RRU Hardware Installation..............................................................................94 10 Powering On an RRU...............................................................................................................95 11 Appendix.....................................................................................................................................97 11.1 Adding an Easy Power Receptacle (Pressfit Type) Connector to an RRU Power Cable...............................98 Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 1 Change History 1 Change History This chapter describes changes in the RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide. Draft A (2012-11-30) This is a draft. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations 2 Installation Preparations About This Chapter This chapter describes the reference documents, tools, and instruments that must be ready before the installation. In addition, it specifies the skills that installation engineers must have. 2.1 Reference Documents Before the installation, you must be familiar with reference documents. 2.2 Tools and Instruments All tools and instruments required for RRU installation must be ready before the installation. 2.3 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsite personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations 2.1 Reference Documents Before the installation, you must be familiar with reference documents. The following reference documents are required during RRU installation:
l RRU3252/RRU3256 Hardware Description l DBS3900 Installation Guide l OCB-01M User Guide This document describes the RRU installation on a pole, U-steel, angle steel, or wall. If RRUs are installed on the IFS06, the following reference document is required:
l DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide 2.2 Tools and Instruments All tools and instruments required for RRU installation must be ready before the installation. Hammer drill ( 12 bit to 14 bit) Electrostatic discharge
(ESD) gloves Vacuum cleaner Heat gun Phillips screwdriver (M3 to M6) Flat-head screwdriver (M3 to M6) Rubber mallet Hydraulic pliers Wire stripper Utility knife Cable cutter Level Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations Adjustable wrench (capacity 32 mm) Torque screwdriver Torque socket Torque wrench Capacity: 17 mm, 21 mm, and 32 mm Combination wrench Capacity: 17 mm, 21 mm, and 32 mm 5 mm
(M3 to M6)
(M3 to M6) Multimeter Marker (diameter 10 mm) Measuring tape 2.3 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsite personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions. Before the installation, pay attention to the following items:
l The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be familiar with the proper installation and operation methods. l The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and installation environment. Generally, only three to five onsite personnel are necessary. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation 3 Information About the Installation About This Chapter Before installing an RRU, you must be familiar with its exterior, ports, installation options, physical supports, and installation clearance requirements. 3.1 RRU Exterior This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an RRU. 3.2 RRU Ports This section describes ports on the RRU panels. An RRU has a bottom panel, cabling cavity panel, and indicator panel. 3.3 RRU Indicators This section describes six indicators on an RRU. They indicate the running status. 3.4 Installation Options This section describes RRU installation options. An RRU can be installed on a pole, U-steel, angle steel, or wall. 3.5 Installation Clearance Requirements of an RRU This section describes the requirements for the installation clearance of a single RRU and multiple RRUs and the requirements for the installation spacing between RRUs. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3.1 RRU Exterior 3 Information About the Installation This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an RRU. Figure 3-1 shows an RRU. Figure 3-1 RRU exterior Figure 3-2 shows RRU dimensions. Figure 3-2 RRU dimensions Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation 3.2 RRU Ports This section describes ports on the RRU panels. An RRU has a bottom panel, cabling cavity panel, and indicator panel. Figure 3-3 shows the ports on the RRU panels. Figure 3-3 Ports on the RRU panels Table 3-1 describes ports and indicators on the RRU panels. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Table 3-1 Ports and indicators on the RRU panels Description TX/RX ports. ANT0 port supports RET signal transmission. Communication port for the RET antenna or port for alarm reporting, supporting RET signal transmission RGPS port, which is optional. Optical port Power supply socket For details, see 3.3 RRU Indicators. Item
(1) Ports at the bottom ANT0-ANT3 Label RET/EXT_ALM
(2) Ports in the cabling cavity
(3) Indicators RGPS CPRI0/IR0 CPRI1/IR1 RTN(+) NEG(-) RUN ALM ACT VSWR CPRI0/IR0 CPRI1/IR1 NOTE If only two RF ports are required, ANT0 and ANT1 are used by default. The RET ports to be used are determined by the software configuration. 3.3 RRU Indicators This section describes six indicators on an RRU. They indicate the running status. For the specific positions of RRU indicators, see 3.2 RRU Ports. Table 3-2 describes RRU indicators. Table 3-2 Indicators on the RRU Label RUN Color Green Status Steady on Steady off Description There is power supply, but the module is faulty. There is no power supply, or the module is faulty. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide Label Color 3 Information About the Installation Status Blinking on for 1s and off for 1s Description The module is working properly. Blinking on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s Software is being loaded to the module, or the module is not started. ALM Red Steady on Alarms are generated, and the module must be replaced. Steady off No alarm is generated. Blinking on for 1s and off for 1s ACT Green Steady on Alarms are generated. The alarms may be caused by the faults on the related modules or ports. Therefore, the necessity for module replacement is uncertain. The module is working properly with TX channels enabled or software is being loaded without RRU running. Blinking on for 1s and off for 1s The module is working properly with TX channels disabled. VSWR Red CPRI0/
IR0 Red or green Steady off Steady on Steady green Steady red Blinking red on for 1s and off for 1s CPRI1/
IR1 Red or green Steady off Steady green Steady red No VSWR alarm is generated. A VSWR alarm is generated. The CPRI link is functioning properly. An optical module fails to transmit or receive signals possibly because the optical module is faulty or the optical fiber cable is broken. The CPRI link is out of lock possibly because of mutual lock of dual-mode clock sources or mismatched data rates over CPRI ports. (You are advised to check the system configuration to rectify the fault.) The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off. The CPRI link is functioning properly. An optical module fails to transmit or receive signals possibly because the optical module is faulty or the optical fiber cable is broken. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide Label Color Status Blinking red on for 1s and off for 1s Steady off 3.4 Installation Options 3 Information About the Installation Description The CPRI link is out of lock possibly because of mutual lock of dual-mode clock sources or mismatched data rates over CPRI ports. (You are advised to check the system configuration to rectify the fault.) The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off. This section describes RRU installation options. An RRU can be installed on a pole, U-steel, angle steel, or wall. Installing an RRU on a Pole Figure 3-4 shows the diameter of a metal pole for installing an RRU. Figure 3-4 Diameter of a pole CAUTION l The diameter of a pole for installing an RRU ranges from 60 mm to 114 mm (2.36 in. to 4.49 in.). The recommended diameter is 80 mm (3.15 in.). l If the diameter of a pole ranges from 60 mm to 76 mm (2.36 in. to 2.99 in.), a maximum of three RRUs can be installed on the pole and the side-mounted installation must not be adopted. l If three or more RRUs must be installed on a pole in centralized mode, the diameter of the pole must range from 76 mm to 114 mm (2.99 in. to 4.49 in.). l The recommended pole thickness is 3.5 mm (0.14 in.) or thicker. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-5 shows an RRU installed on a pole. Figure 3-5 RRU installed on a pole Installing an RRU on U-steel CAUTION l You are advised to install only one RRU on the same U-steel or angle steel. l The angle between the vertical plane and the pole, angle steel, or U-steel must be smaller than or equal to 10, as shown in Figure 3-6. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-6 Requirement of the angle between the ground and the pole, angle steel, or U-steel
(1) RRU
(2) Pole, angle steel, or U-steel Figure 3-7 shows U-steel specifications. Figure 3-7 U-steel specifications Figure 3-8 shows an RRU installed on U-steel. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-8 RRU installed on U-steel Installing an RRU on Angle Steel Figure 3-9 shows angle steel specifications. Figure 3-9 Angle steel specifications CAUTION l It is recommended that only one RRU be installed on one angle steel. l The vertical deviation angle of angle steel must be less than or equal to 10, as shown in Figure 3-6. Figure 3-10 shows an RRU installed on angle steel. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-10 RRU installed on angle steel Installing an RRU on a Wall The wall on which RRUs are installed must meet the following requirements:
l When a single RRU is installed, the wall has a capacity of bearing at least four times the weight of the RRU. l Expansion bolts must be tightened with a torque of 30 Nm (265.52 lbfin.) to ensure the bolts work properly and the wall remains intact without cracks in it. CAUTION The brackets must not be combined when RRUs are installed on a wall. Figure 3-11 shows an RRU installed on a wall. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-11 RRU installed on a wall 3.5 Installation Clearance Requirements of an RRU This section describes the requirements for the installation clearance of a single RRU and multiple RRUs and the requirements for the installation spacing between RRUs. NOTE The recommended installation clearance ensures normal running and provides an appropriate space for OM. If there is sufficient space, leave the recommended installation clearance. The minimum installation clearance ensures normal running and heat dissipation, but OM activities such as checking indicator status and opening the maintenance cavity cannot be properly conducted. If the installation space is restricted, leave the minimum installation clearance. 3.5.1 Clearance for a Single RRU This section describes the recommended and minimum clearance for a single RRU. Recommended Clearance for a Single RRU Figure 3-12 shows the recommended clearance for a single RRU. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-12 Recommended clearance for a single RRU Minimum Clearance for a Single RRU Figure 3-13 shows the minimum clearance for a single RRU. Figure 3-13 Minimum clearance for a single RRU Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Minimum Clearance for a Single RRU Installed on a Tower Figure 3-14 shows the minimum clearance for a single RRU installed on a tower. Figure 3-14 Minimum clearance for a single RRU installed on a tower 3.5.2 Clearance for Multiple RRUs This section describes the recommended and minimum clearance for multiple RRUs. Recommended Clearance for Multiple RRUs Installed in Centralized Mode Figure 3-15 shows the recommended clearance for multiple RRUs installed in centralized mode. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Figure 3-15 Recommended clearance for multiple RRUs installed in centralized mode Minimum Clearance for Multiple RRUs Installed in Centralized Mode Figure 3-16 shows the minimum clearance for multiple RRUs installed in centralized mode. Figure 3-16 Minimum clearance for multiple RRUs installed in centralized mode Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Recommended clearance for multiple RRUs installed on a wall in standard mode Figure 3-17 shows the recommended clearance for multiple RRUs installed on a wall in standard mode. Figure 3-17 Recommended clearance for multiple RRUs installed on a wall in standard mode Minimum clearance for multiple RRUs installed on a wall in standard mode Figure 3-18 shows the minimum clearance for multiple RRUs installed on a wall in standard mode. Figure 3-18 Minimum clearance for multiple RRUs installed on a wall in standard mode Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Recommended Clearance for Multiple RRUs Side-Mounted on a Wall Figure 3-19 shows the recommended clearance for multiple RRUs side-mounted on a wall. Figure 3-19 Recommended clearance for multiple RRUs side-mounted on a wall 3.5.3 Spacing Between RRUs This section describes the horizontal and vertical installation spacing between RRUs. Recommended horizontal spacing between RRUs Figure 3-20 shows the recommended horizontal spacing between RRUs. Figure 3-20 Recommended horizontal spacing between RRUs Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Minimum horizontal spacing between RRUs Figure 3-21 shows the minimum horizontal spacing between RRUs. Figure 3-21 Minimum horizontal spacing between RRUs Recommended vertical spacing between RRUs Figure 3-22 shows the recommended vertical spacing between RRUs. Figure 3-22 Recommended vertical spacing between RRUs Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 3 Information About the Installation Minimum vertical spacing between RRUs Figure 3-23 shows the minimum vertical spacing between RRUs. Figure 3-23 Minimum vertical spacing between RRUs Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 4 Unpacking the Equipment 4 Unpacking the Equipment This chapter describes how to unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact. Context NOTE When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts, you must:
l l Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts with bare hands, sweat-
Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects. soaked gloves, or dirty gloves. CAUTION l After a cabinet or an BBU is unpacked, it must be powered on within 7 days. l After an RRU is unpacked, it must be powered on within 24 hours. Procedure Step 1 Check the total number of articles in each case according to the packing list. If ... Then ... The total number tallies with the packing list Go to Step 2. The total number does not tally with the packing list Find out the cause and report any missing articles to the local Huawei office. Step 2 Check the exterior of the packing case. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 4 Unpacking the Equipment If ... Then ... The outer packing is intact Go to Step 3. The outer packing is severely damaged or soaked Find out the cause and report it to the local Huawei office. The shockwatch label is red Stop unpacking the wooden crate, and then report it to the transportation company. Step 3 Check the type and quantity of the equipment in the cases according to the packing list. If ... Then ... Types and quantity of the article tally with those on the packing list Sign the Packing List with the customer. Either shipment shortage, wrong shipment or damaged articles. Report to the local Huawei office. WARNING To protect the equipment and prevent damage to the equipment, you are advised to keep the unpacked equipment and packing materials indoors, take photos of the stocking environment, packing case or carton, packing materials, and any rusted or eroded equipment, and then file the photos.
----End Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 5 Installation Process 5 Installation Process The installation process involves installing an RRU and RRU cables, checking the RRU hardware installation, and powering on the RRU. Figure 5-1 shows the process of installing an RRU. Figure 5-1 Process of installing an RRU Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 6 Hoisting the RRU and Cables onto a Tower 6 Hoisting the RRU and Cables onto a Tower About This Chapter This section describes how to hoist the RRU and Cables onto a tower and provides important notes about the installation. 6.1 Hoisting an RRU onto a Tower This section describes the procedures and precautions for hoisting an RRU and its mounting kits onto a tower. In tower-mounted scenario, the RRU can be installed on a pole, U-steel, or angle steel. 6.2 Hoisting Fiber Optic Cables onto a Tower This section describes the procedure for hoisting fiber optic cables onto a tower and the precautions that must be taken. 6.3 Hoisting Power Cables onto a Tower This section describes the procedure for hoisting power cables onto a tower and the precautions that must be taken. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 6 Hoisting the RRU and Cables onto a Tower 6.1 Hoisting an RRU onto a Tower This section describes the procedures and precautions for hoisting an RRU and its mounting kits onto a tower. In tower-mounted scenario, the RRU can be installed on a pole, U-steel, or angle steel. Prerequisites Procedure Place a foam pad or cardboard on the ground to protect the housing of the RRU from damage before the binding. Do not stand the RRU upright because the load-bearing capacity of the RF ports at the RRU bottom is low. CAUTION When installed on a tower, only one RRU can be installed in standard mode or reverse mode, and two RRUs can be installed on a pole in back-to-back mode. RRUs cannot be installed on a tower with its side mounted, and the brackets for more than two RRUs cannot be combined. Step 1 Hoist the RRU and mounting kits onto the tower respectively, as shown in Figure 6-1. NOTE Hoist mounting kits onto the tower and then install the mounting kits before hoisting the RRU onto the tower. When hoisting the mounting kits and RRU, protect them from colliding with the tower. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 6 Hoisting the RRU and Cables onto a Tower Figure 6-1 Hoisting the RRU onto the tower
(1) Lifting sling
(2) Fixed pulley
(3) Traction sling 1. After climbing up to the tower, installation engineer A secures the fixed pulley to the tower platform support and leads the lifting sling through the fixed pulley. Installation engineer C binds the RRU mounting kits properly using a lifting sling, as shown in Figure 6-2, and binds the RRU using a lifting sling and a traction sling, as shown in Figure 6-3. 2. Figure 6-2 Binding mounting kits for the RRU Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 6 Hoisting the RRU and Cables onto a Tower Figure 6-3 Binding the RRU
(1) Lifting sling
(2) Lifting eye
(3) Traction sling
(4) Handle CAUTION l The load-bearing capacity of each sling must be greater than 200 kg (441 lb) and the diameter of each sling must be less than 25 mm (0.98 in.). The angle at the top of the lifting sling [by the knot] must not be greater than 60 degrees. l When hoisting the RRU and mounting kits onto the tower, protect them from colliding with the ground and tower. l Hoist the RRU onto the tower before it is installed on a pole, angle steel, or U-steel. l Do not hoist the RRU by the handle or lifting eye only, as shown in Figure 6-4 and Figure 6-5. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 6 Hoisting the RRU and Cables onto a Tower Figure 6-4 Incorrect binding method Figure 6-5 Incorrect binding method 3. Installation engineer B pulls the lifting sling downwards, and installation engineer C pulls the traction sling outwards to protect the RRU from colliding with the tower. Step 2 Installation engineer A catches the RRU, install the RRU on the main bracket until the RRU snaps shut. Step 3 Remove the lifting sling and traction sling. NOTE The procedure for hoisting the RRU and mounting kits onto the tower is for your reference only.
----End Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 6 Hoisting the RRU and Cables onto a Tower 6.2 Hoisting Fiber Optic Cables onto a Tower This section describes the procedure for hoisting fiber optic cables onto a tower and the precautions that must be taken. Context Procedure Cabling requirements for power cables are met. For details, see Cabling Requirements. Step 1 Hoist the fiber optic cables onto the tower, as shown in Figure 6-6. Figure 6-6 Hoisting fiber optic cables onto the tower
(1) Lifting sling
(2) Fixed pulley
(3) Traction sling CAUTION Before hoisting fiber optic cables onto the tower, connect the fiber optic cables to the RRU or BBU based on the labels on both ends of the cables and determine the hoisting direction. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 6 Hoisting the RRU and Cables onto a Tower 2. 1. After climbing up to the tower, installation engineer A secures the fixed pulley to the tower platform support and leads the lifting sling through the fixed pulley. Installation engineer B places the fiber coiler for coiling fiber optic cables on the fiber spools, and installation engineer D lead the lifting sling through the stretch sling of the fiber optic cables and use the other sling as a traction sling to secure the cables 4 m (13.12 ft) away from the lifting sling, as shown in Figure 6-7. Figure 6-7 Binding fiber optic cables
(1) Lifting sling
(2) Stretch sling
(3) Traction sling CAUTION Do not remove the stretch sling and protection pipe or bind fiber optic cables using one sling, as shown in Figure 6-8. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 6 Hoisting the RRU and Cables onto a Tower Figure 6-8 Incorrect binding method 3. 4. Installation engineer B rotates the fiber spools at the speed of 5 m (16.4 ft) to 15 m (49.21 ft) per minute to coil the fiber optic cables. Installation engineer C pulls the lifting sling downwards, and installation engineer D pulls the traction sling outwards to protect the fiber optic cables from colliding with the tower. Step 2 Secure the fiber optic cables to the tower vertically using cable clips. Step 3 Remove the lifting sling, traction sling, and protection pipe. NOTE The procedure for hoisting the fiber optic cables onto the tower is for your reference only.
----End 6.3 Hoisting Power Cables onto a Tower This section describes the procedure for hoisting power cables onto a tower and the precautions that must be taken. Context Procedure Cabling requirements for power cables are met. For details, see Cabling Requirements. The procedure for adding a connector to the RRU power cable on the RRU side is done under the tower. Step 1 Hoist the power cables onto the tower, as shown in Figure 6-9. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 6 Hoisting the RRU and Cables onto a Tower Figure 6-9 Hoisting power cables onto the tower
(1) Lifting sling
(2) Fixed pulley 1. After climbing up to the tower, installation engineer A secures the fixed pulley to the tower 2. platform support and leads the lifting sling through the fixed pulley. Installation engineer B secures three cable ties to the power cable connector, and then secures the power cable to the lifting sling, as shown in Figure 6-10. NOTE The connector on the power cable in the figure is only an example. The actual connector may vary according to the situation. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 6 Hoisting the RRU and Cables onto a Tower Figure 6-10 Binding cable ties 3. Installation engineer B wraps the power cable connector with a layer of PVC insulation tape, as shown in Figure 6-11. NOTE Wrap the PVC insulation tape from 30 mm (1.18 in.) away from one end of the connector until it reaches the other end of the connector. The total length of the wrapped connector is 100 mm (3.94 in.). Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 6 Hoisting the RRU and Cables onto a Tower Figure 6-11 Wrapping the PVC insulation tape 4. Installation engineer C pulls the lifting sling downwards, and installation engineer B pulls the other end of the lifting sling outwards to protect the power cables from colliding with the tower. Step 2 Secure the power cables to the tower vertically using cable clips. Step 3 Remove the cable ties, PVC insulation tape, and lifting sling. NOTE The procedure for hoisting the power cables onto the tower is for your reference only.
----End Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU 7 Installing the RRU About This Chapter This chapter describes the procedure for installing the RRU. The RRU can be installed on a pole, U-steel, angle steel, or wall as required. CAUTION l Do not stand the RRU upright because the load-bearing capacity of the RF ports at the RRU bottom is low. l Place a foam pad or cardboard under an RRU to protect the RRU housing from damage during the installation. 7.1 Mounting Kits for an RRU This section describes the bracket assembly and the attachment plate for an RRU. 7.2 Installing the RRU on a Pole This section illustrates the installation of one or more RRUs on a pole. 7.3 Installing the RRU on U-Steel This section describes the procedure for installing the RRU on U-steel and the precautions that must be taken during the installation. The RRU installed on U-steel can be mounted to a tower or placed on the ground. It is recommended that only one RRU be installed on U-steel. 7.4 Installing the RRU on Angle Steel This section describes the procedure for installing the RRU on angle steel and the precautions that must be taken during the installation. The RRU installed on angle steel can be mounted to a tower or placed on the ground. It is recommended that only one RRU be installed on angle steel. 7.5 Installing the RRU on a Wall This section describes the procedure for installing the RRU on a wall and the precautions that must be taken during the installation. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU 7.1 Mounting Kits for an RRU This section describes the bracket assembly and the attachment plate for an RRU. Figure 7-1 shows the bracket assembly for an RRU. Figure 7-1 Bracket assembly for an RRU
(1) Plastic screw cap (2) M10 nut
(3) Spring washer
(4) Flat washer
(5) M10x150 bolt
(6) Auxiliary mounting bracket
(7) Hoist clamp on the main mounting bracket
(8) Main mounting bracket Figure 7-2 shows the rear view of an RRU. Figure 7-2 Rear view of an RRU
(1) Attachment plate 7.2 Installing the RRU on a Pole This section illustrates the installation of one or more RRUs on a pole. Figure 7-3 shows a single RRU installed on a pole. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-3 Single RRU installed on a pole Figure 7-4 shows two RRUs installed on a pole. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-4 Two RRUs installed on a pole NOTE If two RRUs are installed on a pole, the minimum distance between the two sets of mounting kits is the height of an RRU. Figure 7-5, Figure 7-6, and Figure 7-7 show multiple RRUs installed on a pole. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-5 Three RRUs installed on a pole in centralized mode Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-6 Four RRUs installed on a pole in centralized mode Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-7 Six RRUs installed on a pole in centralized mode 7.2.1 Installing a Single RRU This section describes the procedure for installing a single RRU on a pole and the precautions that must be taken during the installation. Before you install an RRU on a tower, the RRU and mounting kits are hoisted onto the tower. For details, see 6.1 Hoisting an RRU onto a Tower. The hoist clamp on the main mounting bracket is secured properly. Prerequisites Procedure Step 1 Determine a position for installing the main mounting bracket. l If the RRU must be installed on a tower, see 3.5.1 Clearance for a Single RRU to determine a position. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU l If the RRU must be installed on the ground, see Figure 7-8 to determine a position. Figure 7-8 Distance between the main mounting bracket and the ground Step 2 Manually loosen the two M10 nuts on the mounting kits counterclockwise, horizontally remove one end of the M10x150 bolt from the U notch on the auxiliary mounting bracket, and then disassemble the mounting kits, as shown in Figure 7-9. Figure 7-9 Removing the M10x150 bolt from the U notch Step 3 Install the bracket assembly on a pole. Then, place the removed end of the bolt into the U notch, as shown in Figure 7-10. Figure 7-10 Bracket assembly installed on a pole Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Step 4 To secure the bracket assembly to the pole, use a torque wrench with an aperture of 16 mm (0.67 in.) to tighten the two M10 nuts with a torque of 40 Nm (354.03 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 7-11. Figure 7-11 Securing the bracket assembly
(1) Plastic screw cap NOTE Do not remove the plastic screw caps from the bolts on the mounting kits. Step 5 Install the RRU on the main mounting bracket until the RRU snaps shut, as shown in Figure 7-12. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-12 Installing the RRU on the main mounting bracket
----End 7.2.2 Installing Two RRUs This section describes the procedure for installing two RRUs on a pole and the precautions that must be taken during the installation. Procedure Step 1 Install the first RRU, as shown in Figure 7-13. For details, see 7.2.1 Installing a Single RRU. Figure 7-13 Installing the first RRU Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Step 2 Install the second set of mounting kits, The distance between the two sets of mounting kits must equal the height of an RRU. Step 3 Remove the attachment plate from the rear of the second RRU and then install it on the RRU front, as shown in Figure 7-14. Figure 7-14 Removing the attachment plate from the rear of the second RRU and then installing it on the RRU front 1. Remove the attachment plate from the RRU rear using an inner hexagon screwdriver. 2. Install the attachment plate to the RRU front, and tighten the stainless steel screws on the attachment plate with a torque of 4.8 Nm (44.25 lbfin.) using a torque screwdriver. Step 4 Install the second RRU on the main mounting bracket, as shown in . NOTE When you install two RRUs in back-to-back mode, ensure that the cabling cavities of these two RRUs face the same direction. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-15 Installing the second RRU on the main mounting bracket
(1) RRU installed in standard mode
(2) RRU installed in reverse mode
(3) Cabling cavity
----End 7.2.3 Installing Multiple RRUs This section describes the procedure for installing multiple remote radio units (RRUs) on a pole and the precautions that must be taken during the installation. Three, four, or six RRUs can be installed on a pole. The procedures for installing them are the same. Following is the procedure for installing four RRUs on a pole. Context Procedure Step 1 Install the first set of mounting kits on a pole. For details, see 7.2.1 Installing a Single RRU. Step 2 Remove an attachment plate from the RRU rear, and install it on one side of the RRU, as shown in Figure 7-16. (Repeat this step to change the positions of all the other attachment plates of the RRU.) Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-16 Removing an attachment plate from the RRU rear and installing it on one side of the RRU 1. Use an inner hexagon screwdriver to remove the attachment plate from the RRU rear. 2. Install the attachment plate on one side of the RRU, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the stainless steel screws on the attachment plate with a torque of 5 Nm (44.25 lbfin.). Step 3 Install the first RRU on the main mounting bracket in the first set of mounting kits, as shown in Figure 7-17. Figure 7-17 Installing the first RRU on the main mounting bracket Step 4 Install the second main mounting bracket on the side of the first main mounting bracket, as shown in Figure 7-18. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-18 Installing the second main mounting bracket Step 5 Install the second RRU on the second main mounting bracket, as shown in Figure 7-19. Figure 7-19 Installing the second RRU on the main mounting bracket Step 6 Install the third main mounting bracket and the third RRU, as shown in Figure 7-20. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-20 Installing the third RRU on the main mounting bracket Step 7 Install the second set of mounting kits, as shown in Figure 7-21. The minimum distance between the two sets of mounting kits is the height of an RRU. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-21 Installing the second set of mounting kits Step 8 Install the fourth RRU on the main mounting bracket of the second set of mounting kits, as shown in Figure 7-22. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-22 Installing the fourth RRU on the main mounting bracket
----End 7.3 Installing the RRU on U-Steel This section describes the procedure for installing the RRU on U-steel and the precautions that must be taken during the installation. The RRU installed on U-steel can be mounted to a tower or placed on the ground. It is recommended that only one RRU be installed on U-steel. Prerequisites Context Before you install an RRU on a tower, the RRU and mounting kits are hoisted onto the tower. For details, see 6.1 Hoisting an RRU onto a Tower. The hoist clamp on the main mounting bracket is secured properly. Figure 7-23 shows the top view of the RRU installed on angle steel. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide Figure 7-23 Top view of the RRU 7 Installing the RRU
(1) U-steel NOTE If the length of the narrow side of U-steel is less than 40 mm (1.57 in.), install an RRU in mode a or mode b shown in Figure 7-23. Procedure Step 1 Determine a position for installing the main mounting bracket. l If the RRU is to be installed on a tower, determine the position for installing the main mounting bracket by referring to 3.5.1 Clearance for a Single RRU. l If the RRU is to be installed on the ground, determine the position for installing the main mounting bracket by referring to Figure 7-24. Figure 7-24 Distance between the main mounting bracket and the ground Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU NOTE It is recommended that the main mounting bracket be 1200 mm to 1600 mm (47.24 in. to 62.99 in.) above the ground. Step 2 Manually loosen the two M10 nuts on the mounting kits counterclockwise, horizontally remove one end of the M10x150 bolt from the U notch on the auxiliary mounting bracket, and then disassemble the mounting kits, as shown in Figure 7-25. Figure 7-25 Removing the M10x150 bolt from the U notch Step 3 Install the bracket assembly on U-steel. Then, place the removed end of the bolt into the U notch, as shown in Figure 7-26. Figure 7-26 Bracket assembly installed on U-steel Step 4 To secure the bracket assembly to the U-steel, use a torque wrench with an aperture of 16 mm
(0.67 in.) to tighten the two M10 nuts with a torque of 40 Nm (354.03 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 7-27. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-27 Securing the bracket assembly
(1) Plastic screw cap Step 5 Install the RRU on the main mounting bracket until the RRU snaps shut, as shown in Figure 7-28. Figure 7-28 Installing the RRU on the main mounting bracket Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU
----End 7.4 Installing the RRU on Angle Steel This section describes the procedure for installing the RRU on angle steel and the precautions that must be taken during the installation. The RRU installed on angle steel can be mounted to a tower or placed on the ground. It is recommended that only one RRU be installed on angle steel. Prerequisites Context Before you install an RRU on a tower, the RRU and mounting kits are hoisted onto the tower. For details, see 6.1 Hoisting an RRU onto a Tower. The hoist clamp on the main mounting bracket is secured properly. Figure 7-29 shows the top view of the RRU installed on angle steel. Figure 7-29 Top view of the RRU
(1) Angle steel Procedure Step 1 Determine a position for installing the main mounting bracket. l If the RRU is to be installed on a tower, determine the position for installing the main mounting bracket by referring to 3.5.1 Clearance for a Single RRU. l If the RRU is to be installed on the ground, determine the position for installing the main mounting bracket by referring to Figure 7-30. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-30 Distance between the main mounting bracket and the ground NOTE It is recommended that the main mounting bracket be 1200 mm to 1600 mm (47.24 in. to 62.99 in.) above the ground. Step 2 Manually loosen the two M10 nuts on the mounting kits counterclockwise, horizontally remove one end of the M10x150 bolt from the U notch on the auxiliary mounting bracket, and then disassemble the mounting kits, as shown in Figure 7-31. Figure 7-31 Removing the M10x150 bolt from the U notch Step 3 Install the bracket assembly on angle steel. Then, place the removed end of the bolt into the U notch, as shown in Figure 7-32. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-32 Bracket assembly installed on angle steel Step 4 To secure the bracket assembly to the angle steel, use a torque wrench with an aperture of 16 mm (0.67 in.) to tighten the two M10 nuts with a torque of 40 Nm (354.03 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 7-33. Figure 7-33 Securing the bracket assembly
(1) Plastic screw cap Step 5 Install the RRU on the main mounting bracket until the RRU snaps shut, as shown in Figure 7-34. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-34 Installing the RRU on the main mounting bracket
----End 7.5 Installing the RRU on a Wall This section describes the procedure for installing the RRU on a wall and the precautions that must be taken during the installation. Prerequisites Context Procedure The hoist clamp on the main mounting bracket is secured properly. The wall on which RRUs are installed must meet the following requirements:
l When a single RRU is installed, the wall has a capacity of bearing at least four times the weight of the RRU. l Expansion bolts must be tightened with a torque of 15 Nm (265.52 lbfin.) to ensure the bolts work properly and the wall remains intact without cracks in it. Step 1 Remove the plastic screw caps, M10 nuts, spring washers, flat washers, auxiliary brackets, and M10x150 bolts in sequence. Then, use the main mounting bracket to secure the RRU to a wall. Step 2 Place the main mounting bracket against the installation position, use a level to verify that the main mounting bracket is placed horizontally, and then mark anchor points with a marker, as shown in Figure 7-35. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-35 Marking the anchor points
(1) Main mounting bracket
(2) RRU NOTE It is recommended that the main mounting bracket be 1200 mm to 1600 mm (47.24 in. to 62.99 in.) above the ground. Figure 7-36 Expansion bolt assembly
(1) M8x85 bolt
(2) Spring washer 8 (3) Plastic tube
(4) Flat washer 8
(5) Expansion tube Step 3 Drill holes at the anchor points, and then install expansion bolt assemblies, as shown in Figure 7-37. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-37 Drilling a hole and installing an expansion bolt assembly 1. Use a hammer drill with a 12 bit to drill holes vertically at the marked anchor points. Ensure that the depth of each hole ranges from 55 mm to 60 mm (2.17 in. to 2.36 in.). WARNING Take proper safety measures to protect your eyes and respiratory tract against the dust before drilling holes. 2. Vertically insert the M8x85 expansion bolts into the mounting holes and use a rubber mallet to knock them until they are buried in the holes. Partially tighten the expansion bolts clockwise. Loosen the expansion bolts counterclockwise and then remove the M8x85 expansion bolts, spring washers, plastic tubes, and flat washers in sequence. 3. 4. NOTE After completely removing an expansion bolt, store the plastic tube properly. Step 4 Use the two removed M8x85 expansion bolts to secure the main mounting brackets to the wall. Then, use a torque socket to tighten the nuts of the expansion bolts with a torque of 15 Nm
(265.52 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 7-38. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 7 Installing the RRU Figure 7-38 Securing the main mounting bracket to a wall
(1) M8x85 expansion bolts
(2) Spring washers
(3) Flat washers Step 5 Install the RRU on the main mounting bracket until the RRU snaps shut, as shown in Figure 7-39. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide Figure 7-39 Installing the RRU 7 Installing the RRU
----End Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables 8 Installing RRU Cables About This Chapter This chapter describes the procedure for installing RRU cables. 8.1 Cabling Requirements Cables must be routed according to the specified cabling requirements to prevent signal interference. 8.2 Cable Connections This section describes the cable connections for a single RRU and multiple RRUs. 8.3 Installation Process This section describes the process of installing RRU cables. 8.4 RRU Cable List This section describes RRU cable connections. 8.5 Installing an RRU PGND Cable This section describes the procedure for installing an RRU PGND cable. 8.6 Installing an RRU RF Jumper This section describes the procedure for installing an RRU RF jumper. 8.7 Installing an RRU Alarm Cable This section describes the procedure for installing an RRU alarm cable. 8.8 Installing an RRU AISG Multi-Wire Cable and an RRU AISG Extension Cable This section describes the procedures for installing an RRU AISG multi-wire cable and an RRU AISG extension cable. 8.9 Opening the Cover Plate of an RRU Cabling Cavity This section describes the procedure for opening the cover plate of an RRU cabling cavity. 8.10 Installing an RRU Power Cable This section describes the procedure for installing an RRU power cable. 8.11 Installing an Optical Fiber Cable This section describes the procedure for installing an optical fiber cable. 8.12 Closing the Cover Plate of an RRU Cabling Cavity Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables This section describes the procedure for closing the cover plate of an RRU cabling cavity. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables 8.1 Cabling Requirements Cables must be routed according to the specified cabling requirements to prevent signal interference. NOTE If a cable listed below is not required, skip the routing requirements of the cable. General Cabling Requirements Requirements for Bending Radius l The bending radius of the 7/8'' feeder must be more than 250 mm (9.84 in.), and the bending radius of the 5/4'' feeder must be more than 380 mm (14.96 in.). l The bending radius of the 1/4'' jumper, ordinary 1/2'' jumper, super-flexible 1/2'' jumper, and RG-8U jumper must be more than 35 mm (1.38 in.), 127 mm (5 in.), 50 mm (1.97 in.), and 50 mm (1.97 in.), respectively. l The bending radius of the power cable or PGND cable must be at least three times the diameter of the cable. l The bending radius of a fiber optic cable is at least 20 times the diameter of the fiber optic cable, and the minimum bending radius of the breakout cable at each end of the fiber optic cable is 30 mm (1.18 in.). l The bending radius of the E1/T1 cable must be at least three times the diameter of the cable. l The bending radius of the signal cable must be at least five times the diameter of the cable. Requirements for Cable Binding l The same types of cable must be bound together. l Different types of cable must be separately routed with the minimum spacing of 30 mm
(1.18 in.) and cannot be entangled. l The cables must be bound tightly and neatly. The sheaths of the cables must not be damaged. l Cable ties are installed in the same direction, and those at the same horizontal line must be in a straight line. l The excess of indoor cable ties is trimmed off, and the excess of outdoor cable ties allows about 5 mm (0.2 in.), without remaining rough edges. l Labels or nameplates must be attached to both ends, joints, or turns of cables after they are installed. Security Requirements l Cables should be placed away from sharp objects or wall burrs. If these positions are inevitable, protect the cables with protection pipes. l Cables must be routed away from heat sources, or heat-insulation materials are added between cables and heat sources. l Sufficient slack (recommended for about 0.1 m [0.33 ft.]) is provided in cables at turns or the position close to a device, facilitating cable and device maintenance. Indoor Cabling Requirements l Cables are routed indoors through the feeder window. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables l Drip loops must be made outside the feeder window, and the requirements for the minimum bending radius are met. l When cables are routed indoors, engineers are required indoors for cooperation. l The feeder window must be waterproofed. Outdoor Cabling Requirements l Cables routed outdoors must be led through a pipe when they may be damaged. l AC power cables, transmission cables, and cables buried in the ground must be protected. l If cables at the cabinet bottom need to be routed through a pipe along the ground, lead the pipe into the cabinet base for about 3 m (9.84 ft.) to 5 m (16.4 ft.), not into the cabinet. Block the pipe with waterproof tape or silicon gel, and secure the pipe to the cable hole at the cabinet bottom with metal piece. l If cables at the cabinet bottom need to be routed through a pipe along the metal cable trough, do not lead the pipe into the cabinet base. The cable trough must be sealed and routed through the cable hole at the cabinet bottom. l Cables are secured with cable clips. l Cables are routed neatly along the specified cabling direction and secured with cable clips. l The positions for cable clips are determined onsite. For example, the cable clips for the 7/8" feeder are installed at the spacing of 1.5 m (4.92 ft.) to 2 m (6.56 ft.) in the same direction, and the cable clips for the power cables are installed at the spacing of 1 m (3.28 ft.) to 1.5 m (4.92 ft.) in the same direction. l Cable clips must be vertical with cables, and the cables in a cable clip must be parallel. l After routing cables neatly and correctly, tighten the screws on cable clips. Secure cables on the cable tray, as shown in Figure 8-1. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Figure 8-1 Securing cables on the cable tray Secure cables on the tower, as shown in Figure 8-2. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Figure 8-2 Securing cables on the tower Special Cabling Requirements Cabling Requirements for Power Cables l Power cables must be installed in the position specified in engineering design documents. l If the length of power cables is insufficient, replace the cables rather than adding connectors or soldering joints to lengthen the cables. l Cables must be routed by only qualified and trained personnel before all preparations are made. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables l Cables are routed in an untangled and orderly fashion. l If DC power cables need to be routed on the tower platform, lay out the cables on the guardrail with the shortest distance and route the cables along the guardrail. l If DC power cables need to be routed close to a device on the tower, secure the cables to the guardrail or pole with cable clips. The device cannot be far away from the position for securing the cables. Cabling Requirements for PGND Cables l PGND cables for the base station must be connected to the same ground bar. l PGND cables must be buried in the ground or routed indoors. They should not be routed overhead before they are led into the equipment room. l The exterior of the coaxial wire and the shield layer of the shielded cable must have proper electrical contact with the metal surface of the equipment to which they are connected. l PGND cables and signal cables must be installed in an untangled and orderly fashion. A certain distance must be reserved between them to prevent interference from each other. l Fuses or switches must not be installed on the PGND cables. l Other devices must not be used for electrical connections of the PGND cables. l All the metal parts in the housing of the equipment must be reliably connected to the ground terminal. Cabling Requirements for E1 Cables l E1 cables must not cross power cables, PGND cables, or RF cables when routed. If transmission cables are routed with power cables, PGND cables, or RF cables in parallel, the spacing between them must be greater than 30 mm (1.18 in.). l E1 cables are routed straightly and bound neatly with cable ties. l Sufficient slack is provided in E1 cables at turns. Cabling Requirements for Fiber Optic Cables l Fiber optic cables must be routed by at least three qualified and trained personnel before all preparations are made. l Fiber optic cables are used within the temperature range of -40C to 60C. If the current temperature is out of the range, make protection measures or route the cables again. l Cables are routed in an untangled and orderly fashion. l Do not bind fiber optic cables at turns. l Do not stretch, step on, or place heavy objects on fiber optic cables. Keep the cables away from sharp objects. l When fiber optic cables are routed, the excess of the cables must be coiled around special devices, such as a fiber coiler. l When coiling fiber optic cables, apply even strength. Do not bend the cables with force. l Vacant optical connectors must be covered with dustproof caps. l Fiber optic cables cannot be squeezed by the cabinet door when routed through the cabinet. l If fiber optic cables need to be routed on the tower platform, lay out the cables on the guardrail with the shortest distance and route the cables along the guardrail. l If fiber optic cables need to be routed close to a device on the tower, secure the cables to the guardrail or pole with cable clips. The device cannot be far away from the position for securing the cables. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables l If the fiber optic cables close to a device are too long, coil the excess of the cables and secure them on the tower. 8.2 Cable Connections This section describes the cable connections for a single RRU and multiple RRUs. NOTE A lower-level RRU obtains power directly from the external power system, but not from an upper-level RRU using a power cable. For the cable connection between an RRU and an RGPS antenna (optional), refer to the document delivered with the RGPS antenna. For the cable connection between an RRU and an AUF (optional), refer to the document delivered with the AUF. Figure 8-3 shows the cable connections adopted for a single RRU when the alarm monitoring function is provided. Figure 8-3 Cable connections for a single RRU (1)
(1) PGND cable
(2) RRU RF jumper
(4) CPRI optical fiber cable
(5) RRU power cable
(3) RRU alarm cable
(6) RGPS signal cable Figure 8-4 shows the cable connections adopted for a single RRU when the remote electrical tilt (RET) function is provided. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Figure 8-4 Cable connections for a single RRU (2)
(1) PGND cable
(2) RRU RF jumper
(3) RRU AISG multi-wire cable
(4) RRU AISG extension cable
(5) CPRI optical fiber cable
(6) RRU power cable
(7) RGPS signal cable Figure 8-5 shows the cable connections adopted for multiple RRUs when the alarm monitoring function is provided. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Figure 8-5 Cable connections for multiple RRUs (1)
(1) PGND cable
(4) CPRI optical fiber cable or SFP high-speed cable for cascading RRUs
(2) RRU RF jumper
(3) RRU alarm cable
(5) RRU power cable (6) RGPS signal cable NOTE If you must cascade two or more RRUs in the same cell, for example, to expand the capacity, install the alarm cable to the RRU at the last level. Figure 8-6 shows the cable connections adopted for multiple RRUs when the remote electrical tilt (RET) function is provided. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Figure 8-6 Cable connections for multiple RRUs (2)
(1) PGND cable
(2) RRU RF jumper
(3) RRU AISG multi-wire cable
(4) RRU AISG extension cable (5) CPRI optical fiber cable or SFP high-
speed cable for cascading RRUs
(6) RRU power cable
(7) RGPS signal cable 8.3 Installation Process This section describes the process of installing RRU cables. Figure 8-7 shows the process of installing RRU cables. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Figure 8-7 Process of installing RRU cables 8.4 RRU Cable List This section describes RRU cable connections. Table 8-1 lists RRU cables. Table 8-1 RRU cables Cable One End Connector RRU PGND Cable OT terminal
(M6) RRU Power Cable Tool-less female connector
(pressfit type) Connected to... Ground terminal on the RRU NEG(-) and RTN(+) ports on the RRU The Other End Connector Connected to... OT terminal
(M8) Ground terminal on the ground bar Tool-less female connector
(pressfit type) One of RRU0 to RRU5 ports on the EPS Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Cable One End Connector Connected to... The Other End Connector OT terminal
(M4) CPRI Fiber Optic Cable DLC connector CPRI0/IR0 port on the RRU DLC connector Type N connector Round 12-pin connector RGPS antenna RRU RF Jumper Type N connector RGPS Jumper
(optional) Waterproofed DB15 connector CPRI1/IR1 port on the RRU ANT0 to ANT3 ports on the RRU Remote Global Positioning System (RGPS) port at the RRU bottom SFP High-
Speed Cable for Cascaded RRUs
(optional) RRU Alarm Cable (optional) Waterproofed DB9 male connector RET/
EXT_ALM port on the RRU RET/
EXT_ALM port on the RRU RRU AISG Multi-Wire Cable (optional) Waterproofed DB9 male connector Standard AISG female connector SFP20 male connector CPRI1 port on the RRU SFP20 male connector CPRI0 port on the RRU Cord end terminal External alarm device Connected to... One of LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU One of LOAD4 to LOAD9 ports on the PDU CPRI port on the LBBP in the BBU CPRI0/IR0 port on the RRU Antenna system Standard AISG male connector on the remote control unit
(RCU) or on the AISG extension cable Standard AISG male connector on the RCU RRU AISG Extension Cable (optional) Standard AISG male connector Standard AISG female connector Standard AISG female connector on the AISG multi-
wire cable Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables 8.5 Installing an RRU PGND Cable This section describes the procedure for installing an RRU PGND cable. Context Procedure The minimum cross-sectional area of an RRU PGND cable is 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2). The cable has an M6 OT terminal at one end and an M8 terminal at the other end. Step 1 Prepare an RRU PGND cable. 1. Cut the cable to the required length based on the actual cable route. 2. Add an OT terminal to each end of the cable by referring to Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. Step 2 Install the RRU PGND cable. Connect the M6 OT terminal at one end of the PGND cable to the ground terminal at the RRU bottom and the M8 OT terminal at the other end to the external ground bar, as shown in Figure 8-8. Figure 8-8 Installing an RRU PGND cable NOTE Crimp OT terminals in correct directions, as shown in Figure 8-9. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Figure 8-9 Correct direction of an OT terminal Step 3 Label the installed cable by referring to Attaching a Cable-Tying Label.
----End 8.6 Installing an RRU RF Jumper This section describes the procedure for installing an RRU RF jumper. Context The RF ports on the RRU must be connected using RF jumpers to the mapping ANT0 to ANT3 ports on the antenna. Figure 8-10shows the mapping relationship between the RF ports and the antenna ports. Figure 8-10 The mapping relationship between the RF ports and the antenna ports NOTE The port labels in this figure are examples and for reference only. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide Procedure 8 Installing RRU Cables Step 1 Connect the Type N connector at one end of the RRU RF jumper to the ANT port and use a torque wrench to tighten the connector with a torque of 1 Nm (12.39 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 8-11. Figure 8-11 Installing an RRU RF jumper CAUTION On AC-powered electric railways, such as high speed railways, when leaky cables are connected to RRUs installed in tunnels, high-voltage-resistant DC blocks must be installed between RRU RF jumpers and the leaky cables to protect the RRUs against damage. Step 2 Connect the other end of the RF jumper to the external antenna system. Step 3 Waterproof the connectors of the RF jumper by referring to Figure 8-12. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Figure 8-12 Waterproofing a connector of the RF jumper
(1) PVC insulation tape
(2) Waterproof tape NOTE l Before wrapping the waterproof tape, stretch the tape evenly until the length of the tape is twice its original length. l Before wrapping the PVC insulation tape, do not stretch the PVC insulation tape. l Ensure that each layer of tape overlaps more than 50% of the preceding layer. Stretch and press the tape tightly to avoid wrinkles or spaces. Ensure that the tape is tightly wrapped and stuck and will not fall off. l Ensure that the adhesive surface of the tape overlaps the lower layer. l Cable ties, cutting at the position of 3mm ~5mm far from head. 1. Wrap each connector with one layer of insulation tape from bottom up. 2. Wrap each connector with three layers of waterproof tape, first from bottom up, then from top down, and finally from bottom up. Do not cut the tape until all the three layers of the tape are already wrapped. Wrap each layer of tape around the connector tightly. 3. Wrap each connector with three layers of PVC insulation tape, first from bottom up, then from top down, and finally from bottom up. Do not cut the tape until all the three layers of the tape are already wrapped. Wrap each layer of tape around the connector tightly. Step 4 Retain the dustproof caps on vacant antenna connectors and waterproof the dustproof caps, as shown in Figure 8-13. CAUTION Do not remove dustproof caps from vacant antenna connectors. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Figure 8-13 Waterproofing a dustproof cap
(1) Dustproof cap
(2) PVC insulation tape
(3) Waterproof tape NOTE l Before wrapping the waterproof tape, stretch the tape evenly until the length of the tape is twice its original length. l Before wrapping the PVC insulation tape, do not stretch the PVC insulation tape. l Ensure that each layer of tape overlaps more than 50% of the preceding layer. Stretch and press the tape tightly to avoid wrinkles or spaces. Ensure that the tape is tightly wrapped and stuck and will not fall off. l Ensure that the adhesive surface of the tape overlaps the lower layer. l Cable ties, cutting at the position of 3mm~5mm far from head. 1. Verify that dustproof caps are not removed. 2. Wrap each dustproof cap with one layer of PVC insulation tape from bottom up. 3. Wrap each dustproof cap with three layers of waterproof tape, first from bottom up, then from top down, and finally from bottom up. Do not cut the tape until all the three layers of the tape are already wrapped. Wrap each layer of tape around the cap tightly. 4. Wrap each dustproof cap with three layers of PVC insulation tape, first from bottom up, then from top down, and finally from bottom up. Do not cut the tape until all the three layers of the tape are already wrapped. Wrap each layer of tape around the connector tightly. Step 5 Route the cable by referring to Cabling Requirements. Then, use cable ties to bind the cable. Step 6 Label the installed cable by referring to Attaching a Sign Plate Label. Step 7 Attach colored insulation tapes to the jumper by referring to Attaching the Color Ring.
----End 8.7 Installing an RRU Alarm Cable This section describes the procedure for installing an RRU alarm cable. Procedure Step 1 Connect the DB9 connector at one end of the RRU alarm cable to the RET/EXT_ALM port on the RRU, and connect the eight cord end terminals at the other end to the external alarm device, as shown in Figure 8-14. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Figure 8-14 Installing an RRU alarm cable Step 2 Route the cable by referring to Cabling Requirements. Then, use cable ties to bind the cable. Step 3 Label the installed cable by referring to Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End 8.8 Installing an RRU AISG Multi-Wire Cable and an RRU AISG Extension Cable This section describes the procedures for installing an RRU AISG multi-wire cable and an RRU AISG extension cable. Context Procedure When the distance between an RRU and a Remote Control Unit (RCU) is longer than 5 m (16.4 ft.), an AISG multi-wire cable is not long enough to connect the RRU and the RCU. In this case, an AISG extension cable is used to extend the AISG multi-wire cable. l Install an AISG multi-wire cable that is not configured with an AISG extension cable. 1. Connect the waterproofed DB9 connector at one end of the AISG multi-wire cable to the RET/EXT_ALM port on the bottom of the RRU, as shown in Figure 8-15. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Figure 8-15 Installing an RRU AISG multi-wire cable 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the standard AISG male connector on the RCU. 3. Route the cable by referring to Cabling Requirements. Then, use cable ties to bind the cable. Label the installed cable by referring to Attaching an L-Shaped Label. 4. l Install an AISG multi-wire cable that is configured with an AISG extension cable. 1. Connect the waterproofed DB9 connector at one end of the AISG multi-wire cable to the RET/EXT_ALM port on the bottom of the RRU, and the other end of the cable to the standard AISG male connector of the AISG extension cable, as shown in Figure 8-16. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Figure 8-16 Installing an RRU AISG multi-wire cable 2. Connect the other end of the AISG extension cable to the standard AISG male connector on the RCU, as shown in Figure 8-17. Figure 8-17 Installing an RRU AISG multi-wire cable 3. Route the cable by referring to Cabling Requirements. Then, use cable ties to bind the cable. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Label the installed cable by referring to Attaching an L-Shaped Label. 4.
----End 8.9 Opening the Cover Plate of an RRU Cabling Cavity This section describes the procedure for opening the cover plate of an RRU cabling cavity. Procedure Step 1 Wear ESD gloves. CAUTION Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, wear ESD gloves, to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components. Step 2 Use an M4 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the protection screw on the cover plate of the RRU cabling cavity, and pull the handle outwards to open the cover plate, as shown in Figure 8-18. Figure 8-18 Opening the cover plate of the RRU cabling cavity
(1) Protection screw Figure 8-19 shows the RRU cabling cavity. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide Figure 8-19 RRU cabling cavity 8 Installing RRU Cables
(1) Cover plate
(2) Cable diagram on label (3) Cable trough for the optical fiber cable
(4) Cable trough for the power cable (5) Waterproof block
(6) Clip
(7) Cabling cavity
-
-
Step 3 Loosen the screws on the clips, and open the clips, as shown Figure 8-20. NOTE Open the clips only for the cables to be installed. Figure 8-20 Opening clips
----End Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables 8.10 Installing an RRU Power Cable This section describes the procedure for installing an RRU power cable. Prerequisites Context Procedure A tool-less female connector (pressfit type) is added to the RRU power cable on the RRU side. For details, see 11.1 Adding an Easy Power Receptacle (Pressfit Type) Connector to an RRU Power Cable. CAUTION When installing the RRU power cable, connect the RRU power cable first to the RRU and then to the power device. Operations in the reverse sequence may cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies. l Install an RRU power cable that feeds power to an RRU from a DCDU when the DCDU is configured. 1. Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the RRU power cable to the power supply socket on the RRU, as shown in Figure 8-21. Figure 8-21 Installing an RRU power cable Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables CAUTION Ensure that the exposed shield layer of the power cable is properly tightened using the clip. 2. Connect the other end of the RRU power cable to the output terminal on the DCDU. 3. Route the cable by referring to Cabling Requirements. Then, use cable ties to bind the cable. Label the installed cable by referring to Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. 4. l Install an RRU power cable that feeds power to an RRU from the embedded power system
(EPS) when the EPS is configured. 1. Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the RRU power cable to the power supply socket on the RRU, as shown in Figure 8-21. 2. Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the RRU power cable to the RRU0 port on the EPS subrack. NOTE l The blue core wire in the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) is connected to the left port on the EPS subrack, and the black/brown core wire is connected to the right port on the EPS subrack. l The EPS can supply power to a maximum of six RRUs. The RRU power cable can be connected to any of RRU0 to RRU5 ports on the EPS subrack. 3. Route the cable by referring to Cabling Requirements. Then, use cable ties to bind the cable. Label the installed cable by referring to Attaching a Cable-Tying Label. 4.
----End 8.11 Installing an Optical Fiber Cable This section describes the procedure for installing an optical fiber cable. Prerequisites Before the installation, distinguish single-mode optical modules from multi-mode optical modules by either of the following means:
l SM and MM labels on an optical module: SM indicates a single-mode optical module, and MM indicates a multi-mode optical module. l Color of the puller on an optical module: Blue indicates a single-mode optical module, and black or gray indicates a multi-mode optical module. CAUTION The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding CPRI ports. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Context Procedure A CPRI optical fiber cable transmits CPRI signals between a BBU and an RRU. Step 1 Lower the pullers of two optical modules, insert one optical module into the CPRI0 port on the RRU and the other optical module into the CPRI port on the BBU, and raise the pullers, as shown in Figure 8-22. Figure 8-22 Installing an optical module CAUTION The performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes may be abnormal. Therefore, you must insert an fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20 minutes. Step 2 Connect the end labeled 1A and 1B of the optical fiber cable to the optical module on the RRU side, as shown in Figure 8-23. Figure 8-23 Installing an CPRI optical fiber cable Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables CAUTION To avoid any damage to optical fiber cables, secure the optical fiber cable in the cable clip near the power cable to leave some slack at the bend. Tighten the screws on the cable clip with a torque of 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.). Step 3 Connect the end labeled 2A and 2B of the optical fiber cable to the optical module on the BBU side. Step 4 Route the cable by referring to Cabling Requirements. Then, use cable ties to bind the cable. Step 5 Label the optical fiber cable by referring to Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End 8.12 Closing the Cover Plate of an RRU Cabling Cavity This section describes the procedure for closing the cover plate of an RRU cabling cavity. Procedure Step 1 Close clips and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws on each clip with a torque of 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 8-24. Figure 8-24 Closing clips Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables CAUTION Ensure that the exposed shield layer of the power cable is properly tightened using the clip. Step 2 Insert waterproof blocks into vacant cable troughs in the cabling cavity, as shown in Figure 8-25. Figure 8-25 Correct placement of waterproof blocks Step 3 Close the cover plate of the RRU cabling cavity, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws on the cover plate with a torque of 1.4 Nm (12.39 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 8-26. Figure 8-26 Closing the cover plate of the RRU cabling cavity
(1) Protection screw CAUTION Before tightening the screws on the cover plate, ensure that cables and waterproof blocks are properly inserted into troughs. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 8 Installing RRU Cables Step 4 Take off the ESD gloves, and pack up all the tools.
----End Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 9 Checking the RRU Hardware Installation 9 Checking the RRU Hardware Installation This section describes how to check RRU hardware installation after the installation is complete. Table 9-1 provides the checklist for the RRU hardware installation. Table 9-1 Checklist for the RRU hardware installation SN 1 Item The position for each device conforms to the engineering drawing and meets the space requirement. Sufficient space is reserved for equipment maintenance. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 The RRU is securely installed. The cover plate is securely installed on the RRU cabling cavity. Waterproof blocks are securely installed in vacant cable troughs of the RRU cabling cavity, and the cover plate for the cabling cavity is securely installed. In addition, vacant RF ports are covered with dustproof caps and the caps are waterproofed. There are no connectors or joints on each power cable or PGND cable. The terminals at two ends of each power cable or PGND cable are securely soldered or crimped. None of power cables and PGND cables can be short-circuited or reversely connected. In addition, these cables are not damaged or broken. Power cables and PGND cables are separately bound from other cables. The protection grounding of the RRU and the surge protection grounding of the building share one group of ground conductors. The connectors of each signal cable are intact and securely linked, and these cables are not damaged or broken. Labels are correct, legible, and complete at both ends of each cable, feeder, and jumper. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 10 Powering On an RRU 10 Powering On an RRU This section describes how to check the power-on status of an RRU after all the devices are installed. Figure 10-1 shows the RRU power-on check process. Figure 10-1 Powering on an RRU Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 10 Powering On an RRU NOTE l The RRU is provided with -48 V DC power and the external voltage ranges from -32 V DC to -60 V DC. l When the RRU is working properly, the RUN indicator blinks one second on and one second off, and the ALM indicator is steady off. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 11 Appendix 11 Appendix About This Chapter This section describes the procedure for adding an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector. 11.1 Adding an Easy Power Receptacle (Pressfit Type) Connector to an RRU Power Cable This section describes the procedure for adding an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector to an RRU power cable. Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 11 Appendix 11.1 Adding an Easy Power Receptacle (Pressfit Type) Connector to an RRU Power Cable This section describes the procedure for adding an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector to an RRU power cable. Procedure Step 1 Open the cabling cavity and take out the easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector. Then, mark the lengths of the power cable for different operations based on the label on the cover of the cabling cavity, as shown in Figure 11-1. Figure 11-1 Marking the lengths of the RRU power cable for different operations Step 2 Use a cable cutter and wire stripper to strip off the specified length of the sheath from the power cable, as shown in Figure 11-2. Figure 11-2 Stripping off the specified length of sheath from the power cable Step 3 Strip off the sheath from each core wire, as shown in Figure 11-3. Figure 11-3 Stripping off the sheath from each core wire Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide NOTE 11 Appendix Ensure that the length of the sheath stripped off from each core wire must match the length of the notch in the easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector, as shown in Figure 11-4. Figure 11-4 Stripping off the sheath from each core wire Step 4 Strip off the sheath from the power cable to expose its shield layer, as shown in Figure 11-5. Figure 11-5 Stripping off the sheath from the power cable to expose its shield layer Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws, as shown in Figure 11-6. Figure 11-6 Loosening screws Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide 11 Appendix Step 6 Connect the blue core wire labeled NEG(-) to the - port and connect the black core wire labeled RTN(+) to the + port on the easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector. Then, tighten the screws, as shown in Figure 11-7. Figure 11-7 Adding an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector to a power cable Ensure that only a 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) core wire is exposed out of the connector and that the exposed part cannot be folded, as shown in Figure 11-8. Figure 11-8 Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connectors installed in different ways CAUTION If the wire connections are incorrect, the equipment cannot be powered on. Correctly connect the wires 10 seconds later. Step 7 Confirm that the core wires are securely connected to the connector, as shown in Figure 11-9. Figure 11-9 Correct installation of an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100 DBS3900 RRU3252/RRU3256 Installation Guide
----End 11 Appendix Issue Draft A (2012-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2014-08-08 | 2506 ~ 2680 | TNB - Licensed Non-Broadcast Station Transmitter | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2014-08-08
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0007419963
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
Administration Building, Headquarters of Huawei
|
||||
1 |
Shenzhen, N/A
|
|||||
1 |
China
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 | TCB Application Email Address |
A******@BABT.COM
|
||||
1 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
QIS
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
RRU3256-2500
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
Z****** X******
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
+86-7********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
+86-7********
|
||||
1 |
z******@huawei.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 12/31/2014 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | TNB - Licensed Non-Broadcast Station Transmitter | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Remote Radio Unit | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Grant Comments | Power output listed is conducted per port. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures. RF exposure compliance is addressed at the time of licensing, as required by the responsible FCC Bureau(s), including antenna co-location requirements of §1.1307. | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Huawei Technologies Co., LTD
|
||||
1 | Name |
Z**** F******
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
86-75********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
86-75********
|
||||
1 |
z******@huawei.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 27 | 2498.5 | 2687.5 | 22.1 | 11.6 Hz | 5M51D9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 27 | 2501 | 2685 | 21.6 | 11.6 Hz | 9M06D9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 27 | 2506 | 2680 | 22 | 11.6 Hz | 17M9D9W |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC